Charger
OWNER’S MANUAL
2015
2015 Charger
15D481-126-AE Fifth Edition Printed in U.S.A.
FCA US LLC
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
ously manufactured.
Copyright © 2014 Chrysler Group LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . ..............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ..................................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE .................................101
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................249
5
STARTINGANDOPERATING ....................................................383
6
WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES..................................................487
7
MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE...................................................525
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ....................................................589
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ............................................597
10
INDEX .....................................................................607
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
DODGE is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
1
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the
vehicle registration, and the title.
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located
on the right front strut tower inside the engine compart-
ment.
VIN Location
6 INTRODUCTION
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
VIN Location
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS .............12
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition ..............12
▫ KeyFob ............................13
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message ..........14
䡵 SENTRY KEY ..........................16
▫ Replacement Keys .....................17
▫ Customer Key Programming ..............17
▫ General Information ....................17
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED .18
▫ Rearming Of The System .................18
▫ To Arm The System ....................18
▫ To Disarm The System ...................19
▫ Security System Manual Override ...........20
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED ......20
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) ...........20
▫ To Unlock The Doors ...................21
▫ To Lock The Doors .....................22
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk ...................22
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ..................23
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters .......23
2
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement ...........23
▫ General Information ....................25
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .26
▫ How To Use Remote Start ................26
䡵 DOOR LOCKS .........................29
▫ Manual Door Locks .....................29
▫ Power Door Locks .....................30
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors ..........................32
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ .................33
䡵 WINDOWS ...........................38
▫ Power Windows .......................38
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................41
䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE .............42
䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING................43
▫ Trunk Emergency Release ................43
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........44
▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............44
▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................45
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........57
▫ Child Restraints .......................73
▫ Transporting Pets ......................93
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ....94
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ..........................95
▫ Transporting Passengers..................95
▫ Exhaust Gas .........................95
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Keyless Push Button Ignition.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are: OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During start,
ON/RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the
push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the Engine START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
Emergency Key Removal
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, re-
move the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, place the ignition
in the OFF and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does
not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node
(KIN) and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle
operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank
if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron-
ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys-
tem serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the
authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
START/STOP button for unauthorized operation. While
the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for
door locks and decklid release are disabled. If something
triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will pro-
vide the following audible and visible signals: the horn
will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash,
and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
off after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8
cycles if the trigger remains active and then the Vehicle
Security Alarm will rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is placed in the “OFF”
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting
And Operating⬙ for further information).
• Make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙
in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
further information).
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if
equipped. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• Place the vehicle ignition system in the OFF position.
• Push the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ START/STOP button
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped).
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
“Dome ON” position (extreme top position).
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances
up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key
Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not
need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit-
ter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
To Unlock The Doors
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
Flash Lights With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This
feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current
setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Lock The Doors
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash, and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Unlatch The Trunk
Push the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated,
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off,
and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH
(24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
horn will remain on.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
other hand.
2. Separating RKE halves requires screw removal, if
equipped, and gently prying the two halves of the
RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
seal during removal.
Emergency Key Removal Separating Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Transmitter
Case
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together, reposition and secure the screw as
shown in step #2 for removal.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
radios.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle security alarm not active
• Ignition in Off position (Keyless Enter-N-Go™)
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-
jury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START button on
the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds.
The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights
will flash, and horn will chirp twice (if pro-
grammed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will
remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present, the vehicle will start and
then shut down 10 seconds later.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be
activated by pushing the START/STOP button twice
(or the ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN
position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a
third cycle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, push and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
doors, or unlock the vehicle using Passive Entry via the
door handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
push and release the START/STOP button.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-
Go™ feature, the message “Push Button/Insert Key” will
display in the Driver Information Display (DID) until
you push the START button.
Cancel Remote Start
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following
occur:
• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm.
• Any engine warning lights come on.
• Low Fuel Light turns on.
• The hood is opened.
• The hazard switch is pushed.
• The shift lever is moved out of PARK.
• The brake pedal is pushed.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim
panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the inside
door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull
the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward.
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, re-
move the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
(Continued)
Door Lock Knob
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
WARNING! (Continued)
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) system. Refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Power Door Lock Switch
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door
is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents
you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle.
Placing the ignition in the OFF position or closing the
door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, and
the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime
will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
abled.
2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed returned to
0 mph (0 km/h) and the transmission is placed in
PARK.
3. The driver door is opened.
4. The doors were not previously unlocked.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the
window and open the door with the outside door handle.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-
sponse time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door
Handle, and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and if equipped, will arm the
security alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver door handle, grab the front driver
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed,
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati-
cally. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition is in the
OFF position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
search in any passive entry vehicle.
1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitter while a door is ajar.
2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is ajar.
3. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is ajar.
When any of these situations occur, after all ajar doors are
shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside the car, and it does
not find any Passive Entry RKE transmitters outside the
car, the car will unlock and alert the customer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
• There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry door handle.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
To Enter The Trunk
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the deck lid, push the button on the right side
of the deck lid.
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch unless
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmit-
ters is outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
deck lid.
Trunk Button
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
Power Window Switches
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®, the
power window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time
is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become en-
trapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
AUTO-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and some model
passenger door power window switches have an AUTO-
down feature. Push the window switch to the second
detent, release, and the window will go down automati-
cally.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
AUTO operation, push down on the switch briefly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout button (setting it in
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the DOWN position). To enable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout button again
(setting it in the UP position).
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
Window Lockout Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate.
The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by
pressing the TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds.
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk
Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
With the ignition in the OFF position , the Trunk Open
symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on
trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.
Trunk Release Button
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Trunk Emergency Release
As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency
Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism.
In the event of an individual being locked inside the
trunk, the trunk can be opened by actuating the glow-in-
the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching mecha-
nism.
Trunk Emergency Internal Release
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chil-
dren who do not use child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants could
be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front passenger (if equipped with out-
board front passenger BeltAlert) to buckle their seat
belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbelted,
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain
on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once
the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire duration
or until the respective seat belts are buckled. After the
sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains
illuminated until the respective seat belts are buckled. The
driver should instruct all other occupants to buckle their
seat belts. If an outboard front seat belt is unbuckled while
traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert
will provide both audio and visual notification.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy
object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the
driver’s or outboard front passenger’s (if equipped with
BeltAlert) seat belt remains unbuckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul-
der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
(Continued)
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
•
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury.
A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear
the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest
bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6.
To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180
degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above
the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
best.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release but-
ton. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu-
pant, it must be removed.
Adjustable Anchorage
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Man-
agement feature in the front seating positions that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that
is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) — If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
equipped with Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR) which are used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a ratch-
eting sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Advanced Front Air Bags
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
the air bag covers.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air
Bag
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
•
No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on
the instrument panel or steering wheel, because any
such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bags to inflate.
•
Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Al-
ways wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
Advanced Front Air Bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG”
label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impact and certain rollover events, in
addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure you
if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front
and rear seat outboard occupants. SABICs may reduce
the risk of injuries in certain side impact and vehicle
rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction poten-
tial provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure you if you are not
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
WARNING!
•
Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side win-
dows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstruc-
tions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) de-
termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.
The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover
event may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A
faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt preten-
sioners as well as the SABs and SABICs on both sides of
the vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy
the seat belt pretensioners, with or without the SABs and
SABICs, on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle
experiences a near rollover event.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
•
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irrita-
tion, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your
doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the
garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme-
diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” posi-
tion.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition switch is
turned to the “OFF” position.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
System Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition must be changed
from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Air Bag Warning Light
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. The Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in
the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec-
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in the
on position, and stays on after you start the vehicle, or
if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (“SRS”), the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the instru-
ment panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime
will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected.
If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on inter-
mittently or remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately. For additional
information regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light refer to the “Instrument Panel” section of this
manual.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelera-
tor and/or brake pedal
How fast the vehicle was traveling
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in proper
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be pros-
ecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
•
For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or
call 1–866–732–8243.
•
Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or
Age
Recommended Type Of Child Re-
straint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not
reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Con-
vertible Child Restraint, facing
rearward in the rear seat of the ve-
hicle
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Size, Height, Weight Or
Age
Recommended Type Of Child Re-
straint
Small Children Children who are at least two
years old or who have out-grown
the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint
with a five-point Harness, facing
forward in the rear seat of the ve-
hicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown
their forward-facing child restraint,
but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and
the vehicle seat belt, seated in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child
Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH –
Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to in-
stall a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchor-
ages in an outboard position.
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes Center position only may be removed.
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located in the panel be-
tween the rear seatback and the rear window.
They are found under a plastic cover with the
tether anchorage symbol on it.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
Tether Strap Anchorages
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position,
do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
2.
Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that
seating position. For some second row seats, you may
need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You
may also move the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-
ing position.
4.
If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for ad-
ditional information on ALR.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
Restraints in this Vehicle
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using
the seat belt to install a forward facing
child restraint, up to the recommended
weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger seat
and the child restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes Center Only may be removed.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the
child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of ap-
proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child
restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
1 — Cover A — Tether Strap Hook
3 — Attaching Strap B — Tether Anchor
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
Tether Strap Mounting
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Center Tether Attachment
1. Lower the adjustable center head restraint to the full
down position.
2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and head
restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the center tether anchorage located in the panel be-
tween the rear seatback and the rear window.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
(engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in your new
vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 mi (500 km). After
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant
installed at the factory is high-quality and energy-
conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be
consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under
which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Mainte-
nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty. Please check
your oil level with the engine oil indicator often during
the break in period. Add oil as required.
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing
it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison
you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
•
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
•
Never place or install floor mats or other floor cover-
ings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering with the
pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
•
Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects
can become trapped under the brake pedal and accel-
erator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS ............................108
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .108
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .108
▫ Outside Mirrors ......................114
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature —
If Equipped .........................115
▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped..........................115
▫ Outside Mirrors Approach Light —
If Equipped..........................115
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped .......116
▫ Power Mirrors .......................116
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ............117
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .118
▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of
Sun Visor ...........................118
䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
IF EQUIPPED..........................119
▫ Rear Cross Path.......................124
▫ Modes Of Operation ...................125
▫ General Information....................126
3
䡵 SEATS ..............................127
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped ..............128
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped ............130
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped .............131
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .......133
▫ Manual Seats — If Equipped .............134
▫ Head Restraints ......................136
▫ Folding Rear Seat .....................139
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .140
▫ Programming The Memory Feature .........141
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter To Memory .............142
▫ Memory Position Recall .................143
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat ...................144
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD .........145
䡵 LIGHTS .............................146
▫ Headlight Switch .....................146
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .......147
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) .............148
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped .........................148
▫ Headlight Time Delay ..................149
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) —
If Equipped .........................150
▫ Lights-On Reminder ...................150
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped ...............151
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Multifunction Lever ...................152
▫ Turn Signals .........................152
▫ Lane Change Assist ...................153
▫ High/Low Beam Switch ................153
▫ Flash-To-Pass ........................153
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .153
▫ Courtesy Lights .......................154
▫ Ambient Light — If Equipped ............155
▫ Interior Lights .......................155
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......157
▫ Intermittent Wiper System ...............158
▫ Wiper Operation ......................158
▫ Windshield Washers ...................159
▫ Heated Windshield Washer Nozzles ........159
▫ Mist Feature .........................160
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) .............160
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ........161
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .162
䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED ...............163
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED .........................164
䡵 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED ......165
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED .........................167
▫ To Activate ..........................168
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
▫ To Set A Desired Speed .................169
▫ To Deactivate ........................169
▫ To Resume Speed .....................169
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............169
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ................171
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................172
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .174
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .175
▫ To Activate/Deactivate..................176
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed .............177
▫ To Cancel ...........................177
▫ ToTurnOff..........................178
▫ To Resume ..........................178
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............179
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC ......181
▫ Overtake Aid ........................185
▫ ACC Operation At Stop .................185
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu .......186
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance ........187
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC .......190
▫ General Information....................195
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed
Control Mode ........................195
䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
WITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED .......199
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation ...................199
▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF ...............201
▫ Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .202
▫ FCW Limited Warning ..................203
▫ Service FCW Warning ..................203
䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED .............204
▫ LaneSense Operation ...................204
▫ Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF............205
▫ LaneSense Warning Message..............205
▫ Changing LaneSense Status ..............209
䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................210
▫ ParkSense® Sensors ....................210
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display .............211
▫ ParkSense® Display ....................211
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® ........216
▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System .............................217
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System ..........217
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions.......218
䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................220
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE ..................222
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .223
▫ Courtesy Lights .......................224
▫ Sunglasses Bin Door ...................224
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .225
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .226
▫ Programming A Rolling Code .............226
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code .........228
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ......230
▫ Using HomeLink® ....................231
▫ Security ............................231
▫ Troubleshooting Tips ...................232
▫ General Information....................233
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ........233
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express ..............234
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode .........235
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express...............235
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ..........235
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ...................235
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express ..............236
▫ Sunshade Operation....................236
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................236
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ...................236
▫ Ignition Off Operation ..................237
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS ...........237
䡵 CUPHOLDERS ........................241
▫ Front Seat Cupholders ..................241
▫ Rear Seat Cupholders ..................241
䡵 STORAGE ............................243
▫ Glove Compartment ...................243
▫ Console Features .....................243
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Door Storage .........................244
▫ Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
Split-Folding Rear Seat..................245
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES ..............246
▫ Rear Window Defroster .................246
䡵 LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .247
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
a 9-1-1 button.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
NOTE: The ASSIST and 9–1–1 features operate through
the Uconnect® Access service. These buttons will only
operate as long as your Uconnect® Access service is
active. Refer to your “Uconnect® System supplement
manual” for further information.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the Assist button and you’ll be con-
nected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
• Uconnect® Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Uconnect® Access and Uconnect® Access Via
Mobile features.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
9-1-1 Call
1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the
Rearview Mirror or push the cancellation button on the
Phone Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off.
2. The LED light located between the Assist and 9-1-1
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
operator:
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional help is needed.
NOTE:
Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator
may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to
determine if additional help is needed. Once the 9-1-1
operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle’s 9-1-1
Call system, the operator should be able to speak with you
or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in
the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to
remain connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the 9-1-1
operator terminates the connection.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with impor-
tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
wireless and GPS antennas. You could prevent
wireless and GPS signal reception, which can pre-
vent your vehicle from placing an emergency call.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
WARNING! (Continued)
Wireless and GPS signal reception is required for
the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehi-
cle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical sys-
tem. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BAT-
TERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated
red.
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Phone Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle phone
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi-
nated, the air bag system may not be working
properly and the 9-1-1 system may not be able to
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
send a signal to a 9-1-1 operator. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the ORC system immediately.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
• Wireless and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals
are unavailable or obstructed.
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
• Wireless network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
NOTE: Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
wireless and GPS antennas. You could prevent wireless
and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle
from placing an emergency call. Wireless and GPS signal
reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full
forward, full rearward and normal.
Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will auto-
matically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
Outside Mirrors Approach Light — If Equipped
Driver and passenger outside mirrors equipped with
approach lighting contain one LED, which is located in
the upper outboard mirror glass corner. The approach
light supplies illuminated entry lighting, which turns on
in both mirrors when you use the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter or open any door. This LED shines
outward to illuminate the front and rear door handles. It
also shines downward to illuminate the area in front of
the doors.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors
will move slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
mirrors will then return to the original position when the
vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each
stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mir-
rors in Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned
on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel.
Power Mirror Control
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) button to select
the mirror that you want to adjust.
NOTE: A light in the select button will illuminate indi-
cating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and
swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on
automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
“Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun Visor
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate the
sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is parallel
to the side window, grab the sun visor and pull rearwards
until the sun visor is in the desired position. To use the
extender feature of the sun visor, grab the extender which is
located at the rear of the visor and pull rearward.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Slide-On-Rod Feature
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-
based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
Rear Detection Zones
BSM Warning Light
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de-
tection zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum-
per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
Stationary Objects
Opposing Traffic
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where the
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, will alert the driver.
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
RCP Detection Zones
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-
ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de-
tected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will
be reduced.
NOTE:
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio volume is reduced.
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Power Seats — If Equipped
On models equipped with power seats, the switch is
located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor.
Use this switch to move the driver’s seat up or down,
forward or rearward or to recline the seatback.
NOTE: The passenger’s seat will move up or down,
forward or rearward.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seat Control
2 — Seatback Control
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to
increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch
upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar
support.
Power Lumbar Switch
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks.
The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated
using the Uconnect® System.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
LO and none for OFF.
• Press the heated seat button
once to turn the HI
setting ON.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
• Press the heated seat button
a second time to turn
the LO setting ON.
• Press the heated seat button
a third time to turn
the heating elements OFF.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will auto-
matically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 min-
utes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after ap-
proximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®
system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these
seats are located on the rear of the center console. There
are two heated seat switches
that allow the rear
passengers to operate the seats independently.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
LO and none for OFF.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Push the heated seat button
once to select HI-level
heating.
• Push the heated seat button
a second time to select
LO-level heating.
• Push the heated seat button
a third time to turn
the heating elements OFF.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after ap-
proximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two
to one, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will
turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are small fans
that draw the air from the passenger compartment and
move air through fine perforations in the seat cover to
help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds,
HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a second time to
choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a third time to
turn the ventilated seat OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®
system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Manual Seats — If Equipped
Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor.
Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once the seat is in the position desired. Using
body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Seat Adjusting Bar
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Manual Recline Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
NOTE: Do not reverse the head restraints (making the
rear of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to
gain additional clearance to the back of your head.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the RHR.
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button located at the base of the head restraint and
push downward on the head restraint.
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go then push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then
adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location outside
the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to oper-
ating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive
Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or por-
table DVD players. These items may interfere with
the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the
event of a collision and could result in serious
injury or death.
Adjustment Button
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Rear Head Restraints
The center head restraint has two adjustable positions, up
or down. When the center seat is being occupied the head
restraint should be in the raised position. When there are
no occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button located at the base of the head restraint and
push downward on the head restraint.
NOTE:
•
The head restraint should only be removed by qualified
technicians, for service purposes only. If the center rear
head restraints requires removal, see your authorized
dealer.
• The outboard head restraints are not adjustable.
Adjustment Button
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. To fold the rear seatback, pull on
the loops located on the upper seatback.
NOTE:
These loops can be tucked away when not in use.
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
Rear Seatback Loop
Folded Rear Seatback
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper sta-
bility for child seats and/or passengers. An improp-
erly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable
pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steer-
ing column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
mitter can also be programmed to recall the same posi-
tions when the UNLOCK button is pushed.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with two RKE trans-
mitters, one RKE transmitter can be linked to memory
position 1 and the other transmitter can be linked to
memory position 2.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons: The (S)
button, which is used to activate the memory save
function and the (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an
existing profile from memory.
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicles ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column
[if equipped], and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the SET (S) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release the MEMORY
button 1 or 2. The Drivers Information Display (DID)
will display which memory position has been set.
Memory Seat Switches
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
NOTE:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
• To set a memory profile to your RKE transmitter, refer
to “Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory” in this section.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you
must select the “Memory To FOB” or “Personal Settings
Linked To Fob” feature through the Uconnect® system
screen. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the follow-
ing:
1. Place the vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2). The system
will recall any stored settings for this profile. Wait for
the system to complete the memory recall before
continuing to Step 3.
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set,
refer to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this
section for instructions on how to set a memory profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release
the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then push
and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory
Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the Drivers Infor-
mation Display (DID).
4. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE trans-
mitter within 10 seconds.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked from
your memory settings by pushing the SET (S) button, and
within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in PARK, a message will display in the Drivers Informa-
tion Display (DID).
To recall the memory settings for driver 1, push
MEMORY button number 1 on the driver’s door or the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
memory position 1.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, the
memory settings will be recalled with a Passive Entry
Unlock into the driver’s door using the Key Fob linked to
position 1.
To recall the memory setting for driver 2, push MEMORY
button number 2 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, the
memory settings will be recalled with a Passive Entry
Unlock into the driver’s door using the Key Fob linked to
position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY
buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the driver’s door during a recall.
When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, adjustable
pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steer-
ing column (if equipped) stop moving. A delay of one
second will occur before another recall can be selected.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the
vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
• When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF
position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 in
(60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater
than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. The seat will return to its previously set position
when you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ACC or
RUN position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the programmable features in the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
2. Move to the front of the vehicle.
3. Reach under the center front edge of the hood and
push and hold the safety catch lever to the left.
4. Lift the hood upward to the open position.
Hood Release Lever
Safety Catch Lever Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approxi-
mately 6 inches (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instru-
ment panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, inte-
rior lights and fog lights.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light op-
eration.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlight Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Fea-
tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automating
high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the windshield. This camera detects vehicle
specific light and automatically switches from high beams
to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
dealer.
To Activate
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
position.
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
To Deactivate
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal
operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the
system.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an
unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
when the headlight switch is turned off.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
If you turn the headlights, park lights or ignition switch
ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The Headlight Time Delay is programmable us-
ing the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights will turn On when the
engine is started and remain On unless the headlamps
are turned ON, the parking brake is applied, or the
engine is shut Off.
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer
to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
switch.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
push the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Fog Light Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Drivers
Information Display (DID) and a continuous chime
will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi
(1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Multifunction Lever
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
released.
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to
pass position for more than 20 seconds, the high beams
will shut off.
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light
can be turned on by pushing the switch on either side of
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.
Front Map/Reading Lights
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time. The
lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pushed.
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a
second time.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Courtesy Lights
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ambient Light — If Equipped
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibil-
ity of the floor and center console area.
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light and the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
Ambient Light
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of
the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if
equipped).
Dimmer Controls
Instrument Panel Dimmer
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dome Light Position
Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom
“OFF” position. The interior lights will remain off when
the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, Driver Information Display (DID),
and radio when the position lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be-
tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-
tion lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” posi-
tion before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles
and then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Heated Windshield Washer Nozzles
This feature utilizes a heating element to thaw out any ice
buildup that could occur at the outlets or within the
windshield washer nozzles. To activate, push the rear
window defroster button. When the rear window de-
froster times out, the heating element will also shut off. If
required, to reactivate the heated nozzles push the rear
window defroster button as needed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
NOTE: The heated washer nozzles only apply heat to the
nozzle outlets to prevent them from freezing and allow
the nozzles to dispense windshield washer fluid. Always
remove any buildup of snow or ice in front of the washer
nozzles as this will prevent the windshield washer fluid
from reaching the windshield.
Mist Feature
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist
position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road
mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will
continue to operate until you release the multifunction
lever.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Fea-
tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi-
tive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the
OFF position when not using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
• Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem-
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEU-
TRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the shift lever is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
NOTE: Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward.
To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel
upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or
push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in
position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the steering column.
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-
ter or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to pre-
programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in this section.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up to 80
minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated steer-
ing wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the
steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located within
the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the control
button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
once to
turn the heating element ON.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
a second
time to turn the heating element OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows the brake and accelera-
tor pedals to move toward or away from the driver to
provide improved position with the steering wheel.
The switch is located on the front side of the driver’s seat
cushion side shield.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
Push the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Push the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys-
tem is on. The following messages will be displayed on
vehicles equipped with the Driver Information Dis-
play (DID) if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted
when the system is locked out (“Adjustable Pedal
Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Adjustable
Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”).
NOTE:
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
pedal travel.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find
the best possible seat/pedal position.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you
can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or
the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel to
return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed posi-
tions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is on. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a
second time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF 4 — SET-/DECEL
2 — SET+/ACCEL 5 — CANCEL
3 — RESUME
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-)
button and release. Release the accelerator and the ve-
hicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has
been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH
(km/h) will appear indicating what speed was set. A
CRUISE indicator lamp, along with set speed will also
appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the
speed is set.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with-
out erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the SET + button.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-
crease speed by pushing the SET - button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
Electronic Speed Control function performs differently.
Please refer to the proper section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
the vehicle ahead.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional
information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control Mode” in this section.
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control
will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
the mode selected.
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibil-
ity to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always re-
quired while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for 2 seconds in the stop position. If the target
vehicle does not start moving within two seconds
the ACC system will display a message that the
system will release the brakes and that the
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
WARNING! (Continued)
brakes must be applied manually. An audible
chime will sound when the brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
2 — SET+/ACCEL
3 — RESUME
4 — SET-/DECEL
5 — DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE
6 — ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
7 — DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE
8 — CANCEL
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Driver Information Display (DID) displays “ACC
Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the DID displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is set.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE-
VERSE or NEUTRAL.
• When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
• When the brakes are overheated.
• When the driver door is open.
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
• ESC Full-Off Mode is active.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the DID displays
“ACC Ready.”
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
time, the system will turn off and the DID will display
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The DID
will display the set speed.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the DID.
• The system will not be controlling the distance be-
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
• The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the
Drive position.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake
force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
• The ignition is turned off.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
pushed.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The DID will display the last set speed.
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake
force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET + button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the DID.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the DID.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pushing the SET - button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the DID.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the DID.
NOTE:
• When you override and push the SET + button or SET
- buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle
will release the vehicle brakes two seconds after com-
ing to a full stop.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending down-
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to main-
tain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the DID.
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium) Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Set-
ting — Decrease button and release. Each time the button
is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indica-
tor” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automati-
cally to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set
speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the DID and a chime will sound
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the DID is a warning for
the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean
that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a ve-
hicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration
up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle.
This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when
passing on the left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
while following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts
moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the
need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release.
Brake Alert
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
A cancel message will display on the DID and produce a
warning chime. Driver intervention will be required at
this moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver
door is opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel
and the brakes will release. A cancel message will display
on the DID and produce a warning chime. Driver inter-
vention will be required at this moment.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The
DID is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The
information it displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
the following displays in the DID:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap-
tive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• The DID will return to the last display selected after
five seconds of no ACC display activity
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
dirt or ice. In these cases, the DID will display “ACC/
FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the
system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor-
tant to note the following maintenance items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
your authorized dealer.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after-
market grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC/FCW operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” warning will display and also a chime will indicate
when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as
mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of
glass. In these cases, the DID will display “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and the
system will have degraded performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW
system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
temporarily occur.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is no
longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the DID displays “ACC/FCW
Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavail-
able Service Required”, there may be an internal system
fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC func-
tionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable.
If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an
ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see your autho-
rized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-
edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset
from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from
a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of
the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or
accelerate unexpectedly.
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC
system functionality.
Offset Driving Condition Example
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-
mance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
ACC Hill Example
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be atten-
tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To change between the different control modes, push the
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed)
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pushing of the
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CON-
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (chang-
ing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con-
trol mode.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic
Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or
SET (-) button and release. Release the accel-
erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CON-
TROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what
speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con-
trol is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET +
button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the DID display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the DID display.
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the DID display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the DID display.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the
memory:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
• The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the
Drive position.
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
• The ignition is turned off.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
pushed.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
Operation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
visual warnings (within the DID), and may apply a brake
jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal
collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended
to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle
and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system deter-
mines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required. If a Forward Collision Warning with
Mitigation event begins at a speed below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the system may provide the maximum or
partial braking to mitigate the potential forward colli-
sion. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold
the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release
the brakes.
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
message will be deactivated.
FCW Message
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of
FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW ON Or OFF
NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
The forward collision button is located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect® display.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
To turn the FCW system OFF, push the forward collision
button once to turn the system OFF (led turns on).
To turn the FCW system back ON, push the forward
collision button again to turn the system ON (led turns
off).
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you.
Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents the
system from providing limited autonomous braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision.
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from
one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF,
it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are
programmable through the Uconnect® System. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the
Active Braking is the “On” setting, this allows the system
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you when you are farther away and it applies
limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to
avoid a possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
path of the car, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed.
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the DID displays “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality”
or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” momentarily, there may be a condition that limits
FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions, the active braking may not be
fully available. Once the condition that limited the sys-
tem performance is no longer present, the system will
return to its full performance state. If the problem per-
sists, see your authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the DID displays:
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to
detect lane markings and measure vehicle position
within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warn-
ing in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the
lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning
through the Driver Information Display (DID) to prompt
the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a
visual warning through the DID to prompt the driver to
remain within the lane. When only a single lane marking
is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be pro-
vided.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are
on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning
to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on
the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver
does not return their hands to the wheel.
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF
The default status of LaneSense is “OFF”.
The LaneSense button is located on the center stack
below the Uconnect® display.
To turn the LaneSense system ON, push the
LaneSense button to turn the system ON (LED
turns off). A “Lane Sense On” message is shown in the
DID.
To turn the LaneSense system OFF, push the LaneSense
button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state ON or OFF from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the Driver Information Display (DID).
7.0 Driver Information Display (DID) Screen — If
Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense
indicator is solid white when only the left lane mark-
ing has been detected and the system is ready to
provide visual warnings in the DID if an unintentional
lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin
line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual
warnings in the DID and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure oc-
curs.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-
tion, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid
yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to
the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left
thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow
Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system settings can be configured
through the Uconnect® system screen.
Follow these steps to change the LaneSense settings:
1. Push the “Controls” button on touchscreen located on
the bottom of the Uconnect® display.
2. Push the “Settings” button.
3. Push the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button.
When in the Safety & Driving Assistance screen, you can
configure the intensity of the torque warning and the
warning zone sensitivity (early/late) through the person-
alization settings.
NOTE:
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,
traction control system, electronic stability control,
forward collision warning, etc.)
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense® Sys-
tem Usage Precautions” in this section for limitations of
this system and recommendations.
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense® Sensors
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® Warning Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect®
System. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
Driver Information Display (DID). It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to
“Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ParkSense® Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the sound tone will change from fast, to
continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Dis-
tance
(in/cm)
Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
79-59 in
(200-
150 cm)
59-47 in
(150-
120 cm)
47-39 in
(120-
100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in
(30 cm)
Audible
Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2-
Second
Tone
(for rear
center
only)
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Fast
(for rear
center
only)
Fast Continuous
Arc — Left
Rear
None None None None None 2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Dis-
tance
(in/cm)
Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
79-59 in
(200-
150 cm)
59-47 in
(150-
120 cm)
47-39 in
(120-
100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in
(30 cm)
Arc — Cen-
ter Rear
None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flash-
ing
2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Arc —
Right Rear
None None None None None 2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Radio Vol-
ume Re-
duced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense® switch, located on the switch panel below
the Uconnect® display.
When the ParkSense® system is disabled, the
Drivers Information Display (DID) will display
the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approxi-
mately five seconds. Refer to “Drivers Informa-
tion Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. When the shift lever is
moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the DID
will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when
ParkSense® is disabled or defective. The ParkSense®
switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled. If
the ParkSense switch is pushed and the system is dis-
abled or requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will
blink momentarily and then the LED will be ON.
ParkSense® Switch
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle and it will display the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message for five seconds. Refer to “Driver Information
Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
system has detected a faulted condition, the Driver
Information Display (DID) will display the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”
or “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under
this condition, ParkSense® will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-
SORS” appears in the Driver Information Display (DID),
make sure the outer surface and the inside of the rear
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction, and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the DID, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system oper-
ating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense® or render the
system temporarily unavailable.
• When you turn ParkSense® off in DRIVE, the instru-
ment cluster will display ⬙PARKSENSE OFF⬙ for five
seconds. Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense® off,
it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you
cycle the ignition.
•
When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position
and ParkSense® is turned off, the Driver Information
Display (DID) will display “PARKSENSE OFF” message
for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio when
it is sounding an audio tone.
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Ensure the ParkSense® system is OFF if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within
12 inches 30 (cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure
to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a
close object as a sensor problem, causing the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message to be displayed in the Driver Information
Display (DID).
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Park Assist system. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must con-
tinue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever/gear selector is put into REVERSE. The
ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the vehicle
above the rear license plate. The image will be displayed
in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to
“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen.
After five seconds this note will disappear.
NOTE: The ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera has pro-
grammable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect®
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay
feature and it is turned ON, the rear camera image will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted
out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed ex-
ceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
⬙PARK⬙ or the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF
position.
When the Vehicle is shifted out of Reverse (with camera
delay turned OFF) the rear camera mode is exited and the
last touchscreen appears again.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
•
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
•
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView® to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that
the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView®.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink®) and power sunroof switches may
also be included, if equipped.
Overhead Console
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light
can be turned on by pushing the switch on either side of
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.
To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time. The
lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pushed.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a
second time.
Sunglasses Bin Door
At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compart-
ment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motor-
ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three differ-
ent HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button.
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
Overhead Console HomeLink® Buttons
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system.
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-
ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Push and hold the Homelink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2.
Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button,
while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink®
To operate, push and release the programmed
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the
programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera-
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light-
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
also be used at any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit-
ter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 800-355-3515 or,
on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety infor-
mation or assistance.
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE:
•
The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC
and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati-
cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
held rearward again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition Off Operation
NOTE:
• The power sunroof switch can remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the vehicles ignition is
placed to the Off position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
•
This feature is programmable using the Uconnect®
System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with one 12 Volt (13 Amp)
power outlet on the instrument panel and one 12 Volt
(10 Amp) power outlet in the center console that can be
used to power cellular phones, small electronics and
other low powered electrical accessories. The power
outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a “battery”
symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered. Power
outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when the
ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while the
outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to
the battery and powered at all times.
NOTE:
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
• To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR®
knob and element must be used.
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area
on the center stack of the instrument panel.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on
the center console on vehicles not equipped with the
ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could
result.
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
NOTE: If the Media Hub is in use, do not exceed the
maximum power of 100 Watts (8 Amps) for the center
console power outlet. When the Media Hub is not in use,
the outlet can deliver up to 120 Watts (10 Amps). If the
Front Power Outlet
Center Console Power Outlet
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
NOTE: The instrument panel power outlet and dual rear
console USB ports can be changed to “battery” powered
all the time by moving the #12 20 Amp fuse from “IGN”
to “B+”. Refer to “Rear Power Distribution Center
Cover” in “Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)”.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #12 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Instrument Panel Power Outlet/
Dual USB Charge Only Ports
2—
#38 Fuse 15 Amp Blue Center Console Power Outlet/Media Hub
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After the use of high power draw accessories or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the
center console.
Rear Seat Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide
Retractable Cover
Front Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant’s el-
bows.
Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped
On some vehicles the rear cupholders are equipped with
a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear
passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer
Control. Refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Fea-
tures Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Seat Cupholders
Light Ring In Rear Cupholder
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel.
Console Features
There is an open cubby bin located forward of the shift
lever.
Two separate storage compartments are also located
underneath the center console armrest.
Glove Compartment
Center Console
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
Inside the center console armrest, there is a removable
upper storage tray that can be slid forward/rearward on
rails for access to the lower storage area. This tray has an
integrated coin holder, along with additional area for
small items like an ipod or phone. Below the upper tray,
the lower storage compartment is made for larger items,
like CDs and tissue boxes. In addition, the 12 Volt power
outlet, USB and Aux jack are located here.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas.
Front Door Trim Storage
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
Split-Folding Rear Seat
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling
nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper sta-
bility for child seats and/or passengers. An improp-
erly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per-
sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos-
sible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-
come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control. Push this button to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10
minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
push the button a second time.
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The automatic load leveling system will provide a level-
riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15
hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ..........252
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE ..........253
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM ......254
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS .....255
䡵 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) .....264
▫ Engine Oil Life Reset ..................267
▫ Cruise Control........................269
▫ DID Yellow Telltales....................269
▫ DID Red Telltales .....................270
▫ DID Selectable Menu Items ..............273
䡵 Uconnect® SETTINGS ...................284
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate................286
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen..............286
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect® 5.0 Settings .................286
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect® 8.4 Settings..................303
▫ Performance Pages — If Equipped .........324
▫ Performance Control — If Equipped ........333
䡵 Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED ........342
4
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL ..............342
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................343
▫ Radio Operation ......................344
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .344
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................345
▫ Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen —
If Equipped .........................345
▫ Climate Control Functions ...............351
▫ Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls With
Touchscreen — If Equipped ..............353
▫ Climate Control Functions ...............359
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ......360
▫ Operating Tips .......................362
䡵 Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS ..........................365
▫ Introducing Uconnect® .................365
▫ Get Started ..........................366
▫ Basic Voice Commands..................368
▫ Radio ..............................369
▫ Media..............................371
▫ Phone..............................372
▫ Voice Text Reply ......................374
▫ Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) ..................375
▫ Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) ................376
▫ Uconnect® Access (8.4A/8.4AN) ...........377
▫ Register (8.4A/8.4AN) ..................378
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 6 — Glove Box
2 — Instrument Cluster 7 — Power Outlet
3 — Radio Controls — If Equipped 8 — Ignition Start/Stop Button
4 — Uconnect® System 9 — Trunk Release Button
5 — Climate Control Hard Controls 10 — Headlight Switch
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
Instrument Cluster For 3.6L and 5.7L
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
Instrument Cluster For 6.4L
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear
range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red
area. The transition of the red line starts 500 RPM prior to
the actual redline. 6.2L SC redline = 6250 RPM and 6.4L
redline = 6400 RPM.
2. High Beam Indicator
This indicator will turn on when the high beam
headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever
away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to
high beam.
3. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
placing the ignition from the OFF position to the ON/
RUN position. The light should illuminate for approxi-
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition is first cycled
to the ON/RUN position. If the light is either
not on during starting, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
5. Driver Information Display (DID) Area
The odometer display shows the total distance the ve-
hicle has been driven. The trip odometer shows indi-
vidual trip mileage.
NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon trans-
fer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the pur-
chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
the repair technician should leave the odometer reading
the same as it was before the repair or service. If he/she
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
the odometer must be reset at zero.
The DID features an interactive display. For further
information, refer to “Driver Information Display (DID).”
6. Park/Headlight ON Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
7. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
8. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
9. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC) is off.
With Drive Modes, the ESC OFF indicator will be lit any
time the Traction modes is set to Sport, Track, or Full OFF.
10. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
11. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will come
on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
12. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn
signal when the turn signal lever is operated.
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn
signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
13. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as
long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required. However, the con-
ventional brake system will continue to operate normally
if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
14. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
15. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range for a fully
warm vehicle should be 200 F - 230 F which indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H,” and you hear a chime, turn the
engine OFF immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to “Maintaining Your Vehicle”
and follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
16. Seat Belt Reminder Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as
a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in
ON/RUN position. A chime will sound if the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check. The
Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continu-
ously if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled after the
bulb check or when driving. Refer to “Occupant Re-
straints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
17. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
18. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD. The
OBD system monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. The MIL will turn on when
the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine
start. If the MIL does not come on when turning the key
from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
The Driver Information Display (DID) features an interac-
tive display which is located in the instrument cluster.
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pushing the arrow
Driver Information Display (DID) Display
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
buttons located on the left side of the steering wheel. The
DID Menu Items consists of the following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Performance
• Driver Assist — If Equipped
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Audio
• Messages
• Screen Setup
• Diagnostics — If Equipped
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
DID Controls
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
UP And DOWN Arrow Buttons:
Using the UP or DOWN arrows allows you to
cycle through the Main Menu Items.
Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title
area.
LEFT And RIGHT Arrow Buttons:
Using the LEFT or RIGHT arrow buttons
allows you to cycle through the submenu items
of the Main menu item.
NOTE:
• Holding the UP/DOWN or LEFT/RIGHT arrow but-
tons will loop the user through the currently selected
menu or options presented on the screen.
• Main menu and submenu’s wrap for continuous
scrolling.
•
Upon returning to a main menu, the last submenu screen
viewed within that main menu will be displayed.
OK Button:
For Digital Speedometer:
• Pushing the OK button changes units (MPH or km/h).
For Screen Setup and Vehicle Settings:
• OK button allows user to enter menu and submenus.
• Within each submenu layer, the UP/DOWN arrows
will allow the user to select the item of interest.
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Pushing the OK button makes the selection and a
confirmation screen will appear (returning the user to
the 1st page of the submenu).
• Pushing the LEFT arrow button will exit each sub-
menu layer and return to the main menu.
For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus (and new Perfor-
mance Timers):
• Information is reset by pushing and holding the OK
button.
Engine Oil Life Reset
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will display in the DID for five seconds after a single
chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system
is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time
you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To turn off
the message temporarily, push and release the OK button. To
reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the
scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Secondary Method Of Navigating To The Oil Life
Screen In The DID And Holding OK
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the DID display for approximately 10
seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
Use the steering wheel DID controls for the following
procedure(s):
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the DOWN arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to access
the ”Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the OK button until the “Oil Life”
screen displays.
5. Push and release the DOWN arrow button to select “
Yes,” then push and release the OK button to select
reset of the Oil Life.
6. Push and release the UP arrow button to exit the
submenu screen.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Cruise Control
This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell-
tales. These telltales include:
• Cruise Ready
This telltale will illuminate white to indicate
that the Adaptive Cruise Control system is
activated.
• Electronic Speed Control SET
This telltale will illuminate green when the
electronic speed control is SET. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
DID Yellow Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell-
tales. These telltales include:
• Service Forward Collision Warming — If Equipped
This light warns the driver of a potential colli-
sion with the vehicle in front and prompts the
driver to take action in order to avoid the
collision. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind-
shield washer fluid is low.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
• Service Adaptive Cruise Control — If Equipped
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
operating and needs service. Refer to “Adap-
tive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• LaneSense Failure Telltale
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the
LaneSense Departure has detected a failure.
• Service AWD Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All
Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning
properly and that service is required.
DID Red Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable red caution telltales.
These telltales include:
•
Power Steering System Over Temperature — If Equipped
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” message
and a steering wheel icon are displayed on the DID
screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be
taken to the dealer for service. It is likely the
vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer to “Power
Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
NOTE:
• Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera-
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
• Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
more doors may be ajar.
• Decklid Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate the decklid
may be ajar.
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will
sound for four minutes when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
• Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. OBTAIN SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an au-
thorized dealer.
Refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” if jump starting is required.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho-
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall, and your vehicle
may require towing.
• Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as
possible.
• Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
on while driving, have the system inspected at an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that there is excessive trans-
mission fluid temperature that might occur
with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high
torque converter slip condition. If this light comes on,
stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with
the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light goes off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-
nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
DID Selectable Menu Items
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
the desired Selectable Menu item is displayed in the DID.
Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired.
Speedometer
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Speedometer menu is displayed in the DID. Push and
release the OK button to toggle units (km/h or mph) of
digital speedometer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
Vehicle Info
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Vehicle Info menu is displayed in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow button to enter the submenus
items of Vehicle Info. Follow the directional prompts to
access or reset any of the following Vehicle Info submenu
items:
Tire Pressure Monitor
Coolant Temp
Trans Temp
Oil Temp
Oil Pressure
Oil Life
Battery Voltage
AWD Status — If Equipped
Air Intake Temp — If Equipped
Engine Torque — If Equipped
Engine Power — If Equipped
Air-Fuel Ratio— If Equipped
Boost — If Equipped
Intercooler Water Temp — If Equipped
Engine Hours Idle Hours — If Equipped
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Performance Features
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor-
mance Features is intended for off-highway or off-
road use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “ Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for Main Menu/Sub-
Menu selectable items and navigation.
The Performance Features include the following:
• 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Timer
• 0-100 mph (0-161 km/h) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Timer
• 1/8 Mile (200 meters) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Timer
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
• 1/4 Mile (400 meters) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Timer
• Braking Distance
– Distance
– From Speed
• Current G-Forces
• Peak G-Forces
• Lap Timer
• Lap History
– Will list the last 5 lap with the best lap highlighted
in green.
• Top Speed
The following describes each feature and its operation:
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for
the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h) within
10 seconds.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at
0 mph (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when
conditions are met for the event to begin.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 mph
(100 km/h) in less then 10 seconds.
• To clear the vehicle’s best, last, and current 0-60 mph
(0-100 km/h) time, push and hold the OK button for
two seconds.
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
0 to 100 mph (0 to 161 km/h)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for
the vehicle to go from 0 to 100 mph (0 to 161 km/h)
within 20 seconds.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at
0 mph (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when
conditions are met for the event to begin.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 0 to
100 mph (0 to 161 km/h) in less then 20 seconds.
• To clear the vehicle’s best, last and current 0 to
100 mph (0 to 161 km/h) time, push and hold the OK
button for two seconds.
1/8 Mile (200 Meters)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the
vehicle to travel 1/8 mile within 15 seconds and the
vehicle’s speed when it reaches 1/8 mile.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 mph
(0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when condi-
tions are met for the event to begin.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/8
mile (200 meters) in less then 15 seconds.
• To clear the vehicle’s best 1/8 mile (200 meters) run,
push and hold the OK button for five seconds.
1/4 Mile (400 Meters)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the
vehicle to travel 1/4 mile within 25 seconds and the
vehicle’s speed when it reaches 1/4 mile (200 meters).
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 mph
(0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when condi-
tions are met for the event to begin.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/4
mile (400 meters) in less then 25 seconds.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
• To clear the vehicle’s best 1/4 mile 400 meters) run,
push and hold the OK button for two seconds.
Braking Distance
When selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s braking
distance, and the speed at which the brake pedal was
pushed.
• This feature will only function when applying the
brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature.
• The word “READY” will display when conditions are
met for the event to begin.
• The distance and speed measurements display while
the event is taking place.
• The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake
pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com-
plete stop.
• Pushing and holding the OK button will clear the
current and last run values.
Current G-Force
When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force
(lateral and longitudinal) that displays the directions of
the forces.
Peak G-Force
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
values (two lateral and two longitudinal).
• When a force greater than zero is measured, the
display will update the value as it climbs. As the
G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display.
• Push and hold the OK button to clear the peak force
values.
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Lap Timer
When selected, the Lap Timer page will show the timer
always at 0:00.00 with the previous Best and Last time
data (unless the driver has cleared it via hold to Reset).
• Pushing OK will start “current” timer from 0:00.0.
•
When OK is pushed, the times are updated accordingly.
•
As soon as the driver exits the Lap Timer pages, the “current”
timer will stop and the time will be reset to 0:00.00.
• If the driver stays on the Lap Timer pages, the “cur-
rent” timer will reset to 0:00.0 when ignition is placed
in the off position, or ignition placed in the ON
position (or will roll over at 59:59.99 if ever possible).
• Each time the driver pushes OK for a Lap that current
time populates, the Last time and also populates the
1st (top) space on the Timer History page the current
time resets to 0:00.0 at every push of the OK button.
• The timer will stop when the driver navigates away
from this page.
Lap History
When selected, this screen displays the Lap History, and
will color highlight the time that is the best time from the
Timer Page.
• Each time the driver pushes the OK button (while on
the Lap Timer page) the current Lap Time populates
the 1st spot and the rest of the data shifts down.
• Color will indicate the time that is the best time from
the Timer Page.
• Holding the OK button only resets the page you are
on.
• Lap History page is a static display of lap times only.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
Top Speed
When selected, this screen displays the Top Speed since
last reset:
• Populates a top speed from first drive cycle and every
time that speed is exceeded that number is stored here
unless/until the driver resets the screen.
• Latching over ignition cycles.
• Units will change with the global change in units.
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The
information displayed depends on ACC system status.
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
the following displays in the DID:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap-
tive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• Distance Setting Change
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• The DID will return to the last display selected after
five seconds of no ACC display activity.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
LaneSense — If Equipped
The DID displays the current LaneSense system settings.
The information displayed depends on LaneSense sys-
tem status and the conditions that need to be met. For
further information, refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
Fuel Economy
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in the DID.
• Two sub menu pages one with Current value dis-
played and one without the Current Value displayed:
– Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
– Range To Empty (miles or km)
– Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
– The Max and Min values will correspond to the
particular engine requirements
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
• Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber
color and turn green as Fuel Economy improves.
• Hold OK to reset average fuel economy information.
Trip Info
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the DID (Toggle left
or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information
will display the following:
• Distance
• Average Fuel Economy
• Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Audio
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Audio Menu displays in the DID.
Stored Messages
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Messages Menu item is highlighted in the DID. This
feature shows the number of stored warning messages.
Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see
what the stored messages are.
Screen Setup
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Screen Setup Menu displays in the DID. Push and
release the OK button to enter the submenus. The Screen
Setup feature allows you to change what information is
displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location
that information is displayed.
1. Upper Left
• Compass
• Outside Temp. (default)
• Time
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Range to Empty
• Average L/100km (or MPG)
• Current L/100km (or MPG)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• None
2. Upper Right
• Compass (default)
• Outside Temp
• Time
• Range to Empty
• Average L/100km (or MPG)
• Current L/100km (or MPG)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• None
3. Center
• Menu Title (default)
• Compass
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range to Empty
• Average L/100km (or MPG)
• Current L/100km (or MPG)
• Trip A Dis
• Trip B Distance
• Audio Inform
• None
4. Gear Display
• Single Di
• Full PRND (default)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
5. Defaults (defaults: Outside Temp UL, Compass UR,
Center Menu Title)
• Ok
• Cancel
Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) – If Equipped
The Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) is enabled on
vehicles with manual transmission, or when a vehicle
with automatic transmission is in manual shift mode. The
PSI provides the driver with a visual indication within
the DID display when the driver configured gear shift
point has been reached and the driver is still accelerating.
This indication notifies the driver to change gear corre-
sponding to the configured RPMs in the head unit. When
the shift up indicator is shown on the display, the PSI is
advising the driver to engage a higher gear.
The PSI indicator in the DID display remains illuminated
until the driver changes gear, or the driving conditions
return to a situation where changing gear is not required,
corresponding to the configured RPMs in the head unit.
NOTE: Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information on en-
abling, disabling, and configuring the Performance Shift
Indicator.
Uconnect® SETTINGS
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel that allows you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing
so can result in damage to the touchscreen.
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® 5.0 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On
Faceplate
1 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Faceplate
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Buttons On Touchscreen And
Buttons On Faceplate
1 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Faceplate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect®
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect® system may also have a Screen Off and
Back buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the
Uconnect® screen. Push the Screen Off button on the
faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.
Push the Back button on the faceplate to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect® system.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect® touchscreen.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
5.0 Settings
Push the + MORE button on the faceplate and then press
the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to display the
menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect® system
allows you to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety/
Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort &
Remote Start, Engine Off Options, Compass Settings,
Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Set-
tings, Clear Personal Data and System Information.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode,
select the preferred setting. Once the setting is complete,
either press the Back Arrow/Done button on the touch-
screen or the Back button on the faceplate to return to the
previous menu or press the “X” button on the touchscreen to
close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down
Arrow buttons on the right side of the screen will allow you
to toggle up or down through the available settings.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available:
• Display Mode
When in this display you may select the Auto or Manual
display settings. To change Mode status, press and re-
lease the “Auto” or “Manual” button on the touchscreen.
Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu.
• Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English/Français/Español) for all display no-
menclature, including the trip functions and the naviga-
tion system (if equipped). Press the “Language” button
on the touchscreen and select from “English,” “Français,”
or “Español.” Press the back arrow/Done button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touchscreen button is pressed. To
change the Mode status, press and release the “On” or
“Off” button on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow/
Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation
system (if equipped). The following selectable units of
measure are listed below:
• Speed
Select from: “MPH” or “km/h.”
• Distance
Select from: “mi” or “km.”
• Fuel Consumption
Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or
“km/L.”
• Pressure
Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”
• Temperature
Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”
• Power
Select from: “HP” (US), “HP” (UK), and “kW.”
• Torque
Select from: “lb-ft” or “Nm.”
After the desired setting has been selected, press the back
arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
sponse Length settings. To change mode status, press and
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
release the “Brief” or “Long” button on the touchscreen.
Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu.
• Show Command List
When in this display, you may change the Show Com-
mand List settings. To change the mode status, press and
release the “Always,” “With Help,” or “Never” button on
the touchscreen. Press the back arrow/Done button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
• Set Time
When in this display, you may set the time and format
manually. Press the “Set Time” button then choose from
a 12 hour or 24 hour format. Press the corresponding
arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then
select “AM” or “PM.” Press the back arrow/Done button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Show Time Status
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting press the “Show Time Status” button on the
touchscreen and select from “ON” or “OFF.” Press the
back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to
the previous menu.
• Set Date
When in this display, you may set the date manually.
Press the “Set Date” button on the touchscreen then press
the corresponding arrows above and below the current
date to adjust. Press the back arrow/Done button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to
Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This
means the system will warn you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change
the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you
are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change
the FCW status, press and release the “Near” or “Far”
button. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touch-
screen to return to the previous menu.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle.”
• Steering Feel Options — If Equipped
When your vehicle is not equipped with Performance
Control, the Steering Feel Options feature will allow you
to adjust the steering effort and feel. Press the “Sport”
button on the touchscreen to provide the greatest amount
of steering feel, requiring the highest amount of steering
effort. Press the “Normal” button on the touchscreen to
provide greater steering feel, requiring greater steering
effort. Press the “Comfort” button on the touchscreen to
provide a balance of steering feel and steering effort.
Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu.
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• ParkSense®
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission shift lever/gear selector is
in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or
visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The
system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and
Display. To change the ParkSense® status, press and
release the “Sound Only” or “Sound and Display” but-
ton. Then press the back arrow/Done button on the
touchscreen. Refer to “ParkSense®” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and
operating information.
• Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume
The Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be
selected from the DID or Uconnect® System — if
equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW,
MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting
is MEDIUM. To make your selection, press the “Rear
ParkSense® Volume” button on the touchscreen, then
select from “Low,” “Med,” or “High.” Press the back
arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its last known
configuration state through ignition cycles.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
• Blind Spot Alert
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
activated in Lights mode. When this mode is selected, the
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will
only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors. When
Lights & Chime mode is activated, the Blind Spot Moni-
tor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors
as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on.
When Off is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is deactivated. To change the Blind Spot Alert
status, press the “Off,” “Lights,” or “Lights & Chime”
button on the touchscreen. Then press the back arrow/
Done button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
• ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display
whenever the shift lever/gear selector is put into REVERSE.
The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen
display along with a caution note to “check entire surround-
ings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this
note will disappear. To enable or disable, press the
“ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines” button on
the touchscreen, and select “On” or “Off.” Press the back
arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK
or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the
ParkView® Backup Camera Delay press the “Controls”
button on the touchscreen, the “settings” button on the
touchscreen, then the “Safety & Assistance” button on the
touchscreen. Press the “Parkview Backup camera Delay”
button on the touchscreen and select from “ON” or
“OFF.”
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To enable or disable, press the “Rain
Sensing” button on the touchscreen, and select “On” or
“Off.” Press the back arrow/Done button on the touch-
screen to return to the previous menu.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To enable or disable, press the
“Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen, and select
“On” or “Off.” Press the back arrow/Done button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
engine is shut off. To change the Headlight Off Delay
setting, press the “Headlight Off Delay” button on the
touchscreen and choose either “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90”
buttons on the touchscreen to select your desired time
interval. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touch-
screen to return to the previous menu.
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on when the
doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the “Illuminated Approach” button on the touch-
screen and choose either “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90” buttons
on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval.
Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu.
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off, if they were turned on by this feature. To
make your selection, press the “Lights w/Wipers” button
and select from “On” or “Off.” Press the back arrow/
Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con-
ditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
Beams” button on the touchscreen, and select from “On”
or “Off.” Press the back arrow/Done button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu. Refer to
”Automatic High Beam — If Equipped” in “Understand-
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touch-
screen, and select from “On” or “Off.” Press the back
arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights
w/Lock” button on the touchscreen, and select from
“On” or “Off.” Press the back arrow/Done button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
To make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock On Exit”
button on the touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off.”
Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu.
• Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated. To make your selection,
press the “Horn w/Lock” Button and choose “Off,” “1st
Press” or “2nd Press.” Press the back arrow/Done button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Horn w/Remote Start” button on the touch-
screen and select from “On” or “Off.” Press the back
arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
• Remote Door Unlock
This feature will allow you to program your remote door
locks to open “All doors” or only the “Driver door” with
the first push of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
mitter or grabbing the Passive Entry door handle. To
make your selection, press the “Remote Door Unlock”
button on the touchscreen and choose from “All” or
“Driver.” Press the back arrow/Done button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
NOTE: If “Driver Door” is selected, the (RKE) transmitter
will have to be pushed two times in order to unlock all
doors.
• Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. It automatically
unlocks the doors when the outside door handle is
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
grabbed. To make your selection, press the “Passive
Entry” button on the touchscreen and select from “On” or
“Off.” Press the back arrow/Done button on the touch-
screen to return to the previous menu. Refer to “Keyless
Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights
w/Lock” button on the touchscreen, and select from
“On” or “Off.” Press the back arrow/Done button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start”
button on the touchscreen the following settings will be
available:
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera-
tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto Heated
Seats” button on the touchscreen then select either “Off,”
“Remote Start” or “All Starts.” Press the back arrow/
Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status press the “Headlight Off Delay” button on
the touchscreen and select from “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90”
buttons on the touchscreen to select your desired time
interval. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touch-
screen to return to the previous menu.
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status press the “Engine Off
Power Delay” button and select from “0 seconds,” “45
seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes” buttons on the
touchscreen. Press the back arrow/Done button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set,
the compass will automatically compensate for the differ-
ences, and provide the most accurate compass heading.
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the
instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Lap-
tops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
• Perform Compass Calibration
Press the “Calibration” button on the touchscreen to change
this setting. This compass is self-calibrating, which elimi-
nates the need to manually reset the compass. When the
vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic until it is
calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by pressing
the “ON” button on the touchscreen and completing one or
more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects). The compass will now function normally.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Balance/Fade
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the arrows
to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center. Press
the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu.
Compass Variance Map
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
• Equalizer
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Press the back arrow/Done button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touch-
screen and select from “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” buttons on
the touchscreen. Press the back arrow/Done button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.” Press the
back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to
the previous menu.
• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Offset”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.” Press the
back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to
the previous menu.
• Loudness — If Equipped
This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes.
To make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on
the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.” Press the back
arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth®” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Paired Phones
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
• Paired Audio Sources
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
• Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip
followed by pressing the back arrow/Done button on the
touchscreen.
• Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
“Restore Settings” button and select from “Yes” or “No.”
If “Yes” is selected a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you
sure you want to reset your settings to default?” select
“Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit. Press back arrow/
Done button to return to the previous menu.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able:
• Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove all personal
data including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To re-
move all personal information, press the “Clear Personal
Data” button and select from “Yes” or “No.” If “Yes” is
selected a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you
want to clear all personal data?” select “Yes” to Clear, or
“Cancel” to exit. Press the back arrow/Done button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen the following information will be available:
• System Information
When System Information is selected, a System Informa-
tion screen will appear displaying the system software
version.
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect® 8.4 Settings
Press the “Apps,” or the “Controls,” button on the touch-
screen, then press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen
to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the
Uconnect® system allows you to access programmable
features that may be equipped such as Display, Units, Voice,
Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks,
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Options,
Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Set-
tings, Clear Personal Data and System Information.
NOTE:
• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings
may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu, or press the “X” button on
the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Press-
ing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
available settings.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available:
• Display Mode
When in this display you may select one of the auto
display settings. To change Mode status, press and re-
lease the “Manual” or “Auto” button on the touchscreen.
Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display
Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause
the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control
even though the headlights are on.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the brightness with the
headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and “–”
setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point
on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the touch-
screen. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
⬙parade⬙ positions.
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the brightness with the
headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and “–”
setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point
on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the touch-
screen. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
⬙parade⬙ positions.
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Set Theme — If Equipped
This feature will allow you to choose a theme for the
display screen. The theme will change the background
color, highlight color, and button color of the display
screen.
• Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English / Français / Español) for all display
nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navi-
gation system (if equipped). Press the Set Language
button on the touchscreen, then press the desired lan-
guage button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the language, showing that setting has
been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touch-
screen to return to the previous menu.
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touchscreen button (button on the
touchscreen) is pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep”
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-
lected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu.
• Control Screen Time-Out — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Controls Screen will
stay open for five seconds before the screen times out.
With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open
until it is manually closed. Press the Control Screen
Time-Out button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
designated turn within a programmed route. To make
your selection, press the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation
system (if equipped). The following selectable units of
measure are listed below:
• Speed
Select from: “MPH” or “km/h.”
• Distance
Select from: “mi” or “km.”
• Fuel Consumption
Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or
“km/L.”
• Pressure
Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”
• Temperature
Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”
• Power
Select from: “HP” (US), “HP” (UK), and “kW.”
• Torque
Select from: “lb-ft” or “Nm.”
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
After the desired setting has been selected, press the back
arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice Response
Length settings. To change the Voice Response Length,
press the “Brief” or “Detailed” button on the touchscreen
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Show Command List
When in this display, you may change the Show Com-
mand List settings. To change the Show Command List
settings, press the “Always,” “With Help” or “Never”
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-
lected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu.
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Sync Time With GPS
This feature will allow you to automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press
the “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
• Set Time Hours
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu.
• Set Time Minutes
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The
“Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu.
• Time Format
This feature will allow you to select the time format
display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs
or 24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu.
• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button
on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu or press the “X” button on the touch-
screen to close out of the settings screen.
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able:
• Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to
Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This
means the system will warn you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change
the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you
are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change
the FCW status, press and release the “Near” or “Far”
button. Then press the back arrow button on the touch-
screen.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — Active Braking
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The
ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make
your selection, press the “Forward Collision Warning
Active Braking” button on the touchscreen, until a check-
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu. For further
information, refer to “Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
With Mitigation” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
• LaneSense Warning — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which
the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential
lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to
provide either an “Early,” “Medium,” or “Late” warning
zone start point.
For further information, refer to “LaneSense Warning
(LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Ve-
hicle”.
• LaneSense Strength — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
The amount of directional torque the steering system can
apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
departure can be set at “Low,” “Medium” or “High.”
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warn-
ing (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
• Steering Feel Options — If Equipped
The Steering Feel Options feature will allow you to adjust
the steering effort and feel. Press the “Sport” button on
the touchscreen to provide the greatest amount of steer-
ing feel, requiring the highest amount of steering effort.
Press the “Normal” button on the touchscreen to provide
greater steering feel, requiring greater steering effort.
Press the “Comfort” button on the touchscreen to provide
a balance of steering feel and steering effort. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• ParkSense®
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE
and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It
will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate
the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled
with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the
ParkSense® status, press and release the “Sound Only”
or “Sound and Display” button. Then press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen. Refer to “ParkSense®”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for
system function and operating information.
• Front ParkSense® Volume
The Front ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be
selected from the DID or Uconnect® System. The chime
volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The
factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make
your selection, press the “Front ParkSense® Vol.” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its last
known configuration state through ignition cycles.
• Rear ParkSense® Volume
The Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be
selected from the DID or Uconnect® System. The chime
volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The
factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make
your selection, press the “Rear ParkSense® Vol.” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its last
known configuration state through ignition cycles.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
• Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Side
Mirrors in Reverse” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Blind Spot Alert
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected,
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.
When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn
signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the
Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,” “Lights” or
“Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen. Then press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display
whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image
will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along
with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across
the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will
disappear. To make your selection, press the “ParkView
Backup Camera Active Guidelines” button on the touch-
screen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating
that the setting had been selected. Press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the
navigation or audio screen appears again. When the ve-
hicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned
ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of “RE-
VERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into “PARK” or the
ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the
ParkView® Backup Camera Delay press the “Controls”
button on the touchscreen, the “settings” button on the
touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
on the touchscreen. Press the “Parkview Backup Camera
Delay” button on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView®
Delay ON or OFF.
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the
“Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” button on the touchscreen,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that
the setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To make your selection, press
the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the
amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine
is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting,
press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select
your desired time interval, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec,
60 sec or 90 seconds. Press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the
back button on the faceplate.
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select
your desired time interval. Press the back arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or
push the back button on the faceplate.
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the “Headlights With Wipers” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con-
ditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
Beams” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has
been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touch-
screen to return to the previous menu, or push the back
button on the faceplate. Refer to “Lights — If Equipped”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for
further information.
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touch-
screen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indi-
cating that the setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the hazard lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the
passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with
or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To
make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting has been
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
on the faceplate.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock On Exit”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that the setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the
passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with
or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To
make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
• Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated. To make your selection,
press either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd Press” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Sound Horn with Remote Start” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is pro-
grammed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the
driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press
Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed,
touching the handle more than once will only result in
the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected,
once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/
unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use
RKE transmitter).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
• Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter LOCK or UNLOCK buttons. To make
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
• Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob On/Off — If
Equipped
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored
to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors,
steering column position and radio station pre-sets) to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Personal Set-
tings Linked to Key Fob” button on the touchscreen, until
a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the
back button on the faceplate.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for further information.
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera-
tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto-On
Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With
Vehicle Start” button to select from “Off,” “Remote Start”
or “All Starts” until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will
automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit Seat” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect® Phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay setting, press the “+” or “-”
button on the touchscreen to select your desired time
interval, and choose from “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,”
“5 minutes” or “10 minutes.” Press the back arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on the touch-
screen to select your desired time interval. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Balance/Fade
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows
to adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center. Press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
• Equalizer
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble
settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Press the back arrow button on the touch-
screen to return to the previous menu.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu.
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.” Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu.
• Loudness — If Equipped
Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the
touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth®” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Paired Phones
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
• Paired Audio Sources
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
• Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
• Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking
⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”
select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the
settings are restored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings
reset to default.⬙ Press the okay button on the touchscreen
to exit.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able:
• Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To remove
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to
Clear, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared,
a pop up appears stating ⬙Personal data cleared”. Press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen the following information will be available:
• System Information
When System Information is selected, a System Informa-
tion screen will appear displaying the system software
version.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
Performance Pages — If Equipped
Performance Pages is an application that provides a
display for performance indicators, as received from the
Instrument Cluster, that will help you gain familiarity
with the capabilities of your vehicle in real-time.
To access the Performance Pages, press the “Apps”
button on the touchscreen then press the “Performance
Pages” button on the touchscreen. Press the desired
button on the touchscreen to access that specific Perfor-
mance Page.
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor-
mance Pages is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the Performance Pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
The Performance Pages include the following:
• Home
• Timers
• Gauges 1
• Gauges 2
• G-Force
• Engine
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The following describes each feature and its operation:
Home
When Home is selected, the following options will be
available:
• A series of six images which can be selected by the
user.
• A left and right arrow to allow the user to scroll
through vehicle images.
• A short-cut to the Performance Control feature.
Performance Pages — Home
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
Timers
When the Timers Page is selected you will be able to
select from following “Tickets”:
• Current
Pressing the “Current” button displays a “real time”
summary of performance timers.
• Last
Pressing the “Last” button displays the last recorded run
of performance timers.
• Best
Pressing the “Best” button displays the best recorded run
of performance timers, except for braking data.
Performance Pages — Timers
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Save
Pressing the “Save” button will let you save the last run.
Any saved run over 10, will overwrite the last saved run
for Uconnect® System storage. The operation of the Save
feature is listed below:
• With a USB jump drive installed, press the “USB”
button to save to the jump drive.
• With an SD Card installed, press the “SD Card” to save
runs to the SD Card.
• Press the “Uconnect” button to save the runs to the
Owner web page.
• Press the “Cancel” button to view the last timer
“Ticket.”
The “Tickets” contain the timers listed below:
• Reaction Time
Measures the driver’s reaction time for launching the
vehicle against a simulated a drag strip timing light
(behavior modeled after 500 Sportsman Tree) displayed
in the Driver Information Display (DID).
NOTE: The Reaction Time, MPH, ⅛ and ¼ Mile timers
will be “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 MPH (0 km/h)
Performance Pages — Save
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
• 0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
60 mph (0 to 100 km/h).
• 0-100 MPH (0-160 km/h)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
100 mph (0 to 160 km/h).
• ⅛ Mile (200 meter)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ⅛ mile
(200 meters).
• ¼ Mile (400 meter)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ¼ mile
(400 meters).
• Brake Distance
Displays the distance it takes the vehicle to make a full
stop.
NOTE: The distance measurement will be aborted if the
brake pedal is released or the parking brake is engaged,
before the vehicle comes to a complete stop.
• Brake Speed
Displays the speed the vehicle is traveling when the
brake pedal is depressed.
NOTE: Brake Distance and Speed timers will only dis-
play ⬙ready⬙ when vehicle is traveling at greater than
30 MPH (48 km/h).
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Gauges 1
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Coolant Temperature
Shows the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
• Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature.
Performance Pages — Gauges 1
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
Gauges 2
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Battery Voltage
Shows the actual battery voltage.
• Intake Air Temperature
Shows the actual intake air temperature.
• Transmission Temperature (Automatic Transmission
Only)
Shows the actual transmission temperature.
Performance Pages — Gauges 2 (Automatic
Transmission)
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
G-Force
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
values (two lateral and two longitudinal) as well as
steering angle.
When G-Force is selected, the following features will be
available:
• Lateral G-Force Left and Right
The lateral g-force measures the (sideways) left and right
force of the vehicle.
• Longitudinal G-Force Acceleration and Braking
The longitudinal g-force measures the acceleration and
braking force of the vehicle.
• Peak G-Forces Acceleration and Braking, Left and
Right
This shows the maximum g-forces that have been
achieved since the last reset from the DID. Peak values
are maintained through ignition cycles by the DID until
they are cleared by the driver.
Charger Performance Pages — G-Force
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
• Vehicle Speed
Vehicle Speed measures the current speed of the vehicle
in either mph or km/h, starting at 0 with no maximum
value.
• Steering Wheel Angle
Steering Wheel Angle utilizes the steering angle sensor to
measure the degree of the steering wheel relative to zero.
The zero degree measurement indicates a steering wheel
straight ahead position. When the steering angle value is
negative, this indicates a turn to the left, and when the
steering angle value is positive, a turn to the right.
Engine
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Vehicle Speed
Shows the actual vehicle speed.
Performance Pages — Engine
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Instantaneous Horsepower/Kilowatts
Shows the instantaneous horsepower.
• Instantaneous Torque
Shows the instantaneous torque.
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual engine oil pressure.
• Gear (Automatic Transmission Only)
Shows the current (or pending) operating gear of the
vehicle.
Performance Control — If Equipped
Your vehicle is equipped with a Performance Control
feature which allows for coordinating the operation of
various vehicle systems depending upon the type of driv-
ing behavior desired. The Performance Control feature is
controlled through the Uconnect® radio and may be ac-
cessed by performing any of the following:
• Pushing the Super Track Pack button on the instru-
ment panel switch bank.
• Selecting “Performance Control” from the “Apps”
menu.
• Selecting “Performance Control” from within the Per-
formance Pages menu.
You will be able to enable, disable, and customize the
functionality of the Launch Control and Drive Mode
Set-Up features within Performance Control.
Descriptions of these features are provided below. To
access information about the functionality of these fea-
tures through the Uconnect® system, press the “Info”
button on the touchscreen.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
Launch Mode
WARNING!
Launch Mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. It is recommended that this feature be
used in a controlled environment, and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control system
that is designed to allow the driver to achieve maximum
vehicle acceleration in a straight line. Launch Control is a
form of traction control that manages tire slip while
launching the vehicle. This feature is intended for use
during race events on a closed course where consistent
Launch Control
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
quarter mile and zero to sixty times are desired. The
system is not intended to compensate for lack of driver
experience or familiarity with the race track. Use of this
feature in low traction (cold, wet, gravel, etc.) conditions
may results in excess wheel slip outside this systems
control resulting in an aborted launch.
NOTE:
•
Launch control should not be used on public roads.
Always check track conditions and the surrounding area.
• Launch Control is not available for the first 500 miles
of the vehicle’s life.
• Launch Control should only be used when the engine
and transmission are at operating temperature.
• Launch Control is intended to be used on dry, paved
road surfaces only. Use on slippery or loose surfaces
may cause damage to vehicle components and is not
recommended.
Drive Mode Set-Up
Pressing the “Drive Mode Set-Up” button on the touch-
screen within the Performance Control screen indicates the
real-time status of the various systems. Pressing the “Sport
Mode Set-Up” or “Default Mode Set-Up” buttons on the
Drive Mode Set-Up
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
touchscreen, the driver can configure their individual drive
modes and see how those configurations affect the perfor-
mance of the vehicle.
NOTE: Not all of the options listed in this manual are
available on every vehicle, below is a chart with all
available Drive Mode vehicle configurations.
Available Mode Configurations
Transmission Auto
Engine N/A
Engine/Trans X
Steering X
Paddle Shifters X
Traction Control X
Refer to the Sport and Default modes for their detailed
operation.
NOTE: These settings will remain in effect when using
the Launch Control feature.
Default Mode
The vehicle will always start in Default Mode. This mode
is for typical driving conditions. While in Default Mode,
the Engine, Transmission and Traction will operate in
Default Mode
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
their Normal settings and cannot be changed. The Steer-
ing assist may be configured to Normal, Sport, or Com-
fort by pressing the corresponding buttons on the touch-
screen. The Paddle Shifters may be enabled or disabled
while in this mode.
Sport Mode
Sport Mode is a configuration set-up for typical enthusi-
ast driving. The Transmission and Steering are both set to
their Sport settings. The steering wheel paddle switches
are enabled. The Traction Control defaults to Normal.
Default Mode Set-Up
Sport Mode
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
Any of these four settings may be changed to the driver’s
preferences by pressing the buttons on the touchscreen.
Push the Sport button on the instrument panel switch
bank to put the vehicle in Sport Mode and activate these
settings. The customized settings will only be active
when the Sport button is active.
Possible Drive Mode configurations are listed below with
accompanying descriptions. The information contained
in the list below can also be accessed from within the
mode Set-Up menus. To access the information, press the
“Info” button on the touchscreen from the mode Set-Up
menu, and use the left/right arrows to toggle through
available descriptions. The title for each system in the
Set-Up menu can be pressed, which provides the descrip-
tions for each function of that system.
Sport Mode Set-Up
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine/Trans • Sport
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen for improved
throttle response and modified shifting for an enhanced
driving experience.
• Normal
Press the “Norm” button on the touchscreen for a balance
of throttle response, shift comfort and economy for
normal driving.
Engine/Trans
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
Paddle Shifters
• ON
Press the “ON” button on the touchscreen to enable
steering wheel Paddle Shifters.
• OFF
Press the “OFF” button on the touchscreen to disable
steering wheel Paddle Shifters.
Traction
Paddle Shifters
Traction Control
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• SPORT
Press the “SPORT” button on the touchscreen to turn off
traction control and reduce stability control.
• NORMAL
Press the “NORM” button on the touchscreen to provide
full traction control and full stability control.
Steering
• Sport
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to provide
the greatest amount of steering feel, requiring the highest
amount of steering effort.
Steering
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
• Normal
Press the “Norm” button on the touchscreen to provide
greater steering feel, requiring greater steering effort.
• Comfort
Press the “Comf” button on the touchscreen to provide a
balance of steering feel and steering effort.
Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio,
refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL
This feature allows an iPod® or an external USB device to
be plugged into the USB port.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
The Media hub also allows the use of an SD card. For further
information, refer to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
AUX/USB/SD Card Ports
1 — Aux Jack
2 — USB Port
3 — SD Card Slot
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Located on the rear of the front center console are dual
USB “Charge Only” ports.
The USB “Charge Only” ports will recharge battery
operated USB devices when connected.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
Rear USB Charging Ports
Remote Sound Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
AUX, etc.)
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect® system dis-
play.
When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (Ra-
dio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
display.
Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen — If
Equipped
Buttons On Your Uconnect® Faceplate
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
Uconnect® screen.
Uconnect® Manual Climate Controls — Buttons On The
Faceplate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
Buttons On Your Uconnect® Touchscreen
The buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect® system screen.
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On
Your Faceplate And The Buttons On Your Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Push and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Push and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Push and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
Uconnect® 5.0 Manual Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Front Defrost Button
Push and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging.
5. Rear Defrost Button
Push and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes. For each additional push of
this button, five additional minutes will be added to the
timer function.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
6. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected
using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or
buttons on the touchscreen as follows:
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
control knob counterclockwise.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
7. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved
up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the
air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demis-
ter outlets.
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX
and DEFROST modes even if the A/C button is not
pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the wind-
shield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only
when necessary.
8. Climate Control OFF Button
Push and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
9. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer tem-
perature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide
the temperature bar button into the red area for warmer
temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
10. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar button into the red area for
warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
11. Temperature Control
Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to
regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red
area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the tem-
perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler tempera-
tures.
12. SYNC
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize
the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem-
perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
13. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar button into the blue area for
cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
14. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar button into the blue area for
cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging
of the windows.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if
needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo-
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates
when MAX A/C is ON.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior
settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the Recirculation control button. The recircula-
tion indicator will illuminate when this button is selected.
Push the button a second time to turn off the Recircula-
tion mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
feature may be unavailable (button on touchscreen
greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual
Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed
in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
and then turn off.
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls With
Touchscreen — If Equipped
Buttons On The Faceplate
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
Uconnect® screen.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect® system screen.
Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On The
Faceplate
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls —
Buttons On The Touchscreen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
4. AUTO Operation Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
this function will cause the system to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
Operation” for more information.
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the Automatic Temperature Con-
trol (ATC) to switch into manual mode. If the front
defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return
the previous setting.
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
(Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar button towards the red arrow
for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
(Uconnect® 8.4 Radio Only)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar button towards the blue arrow
for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
9. SYNC
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize
the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem-
perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
10. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen
as follows:
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
control knob counterclockwise.
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Button On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
11. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved
up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the
air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demis-
ter outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.
12. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
(Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler tempera-
ture settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the
temperature bar button towards the blue arrow for cooler
temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
(Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer tem-
perature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide
the temperature bar button towards the red arrow for
warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if
needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo-
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
the front of the radiator and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is
ON.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the
selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
feature may be unavailable (button on touchscreen
greyed out). The Recirculation mode is not allowed in
Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
and then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Press the AUTO button on the faceplate or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Tempera-
ture Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas-
senger temperature control buttons. Once the desired
temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and
automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi-
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® System Settings” in
this section of the manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con-
trol.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently
from each other. If any feature is controlled manually,
temperature control will continue to operate automati-
cally.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
dow fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower
speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side win-
dows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
but rainy or humid weather.
NOTE:
• Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automati-
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instruc-
tions.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
Manual Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect®
Start using Uconnect® Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect® 5.0
or 8.4A/8.4AN system.
Key Features:
• 5” touchscreen
• Three buttons on either side of the display
Uconnect® 5.0
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect® 8.4AN system. If not, you have a
Uconnect® 8.4A system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect® system with
your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing
instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger con-
versations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
Uconnect® 8.4AN
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect® Voice Command
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Re-
ceive A Text
2 — For all radios: Push To Begin Radio or Media functions. For
8.4A/8.4AN only: Push to begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions
3 — Push To End Call
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect® system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
Uconnect® 5.0
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio® stations you would like to hear. (Sub-
scription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio® trial
required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, press the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
a list of commands.
Uconnect® 5.0 Radio
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Radio
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Media
Uconnect® offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth®
and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and iPod® devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth®
• Change source to iPod®
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your iPod® or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
song and genre information is displayed.
Uconnect® 5.0 Media
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect®. When the Phonebook button is illumi-
nated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say one of
the following commandsѧ
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Media
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect® 5.0 Phone
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Phone
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect® will announce incoming text messages. Push
the Phone button
and say Listen. (Must have com-
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect® system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
the Phone button
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect® prompts. After the beep,
repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the
system prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in Traffic. See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be Late.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Okay. Where are you? I will be <num-
ber> minutes
late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa-
tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advan-
tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone® iOS6 or later sup-
ports reading incoming text messages only.
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-
free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
control.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
The Uconnect® navigation feature helps you save time
and become more productive when you know exactly
how to get to where you want to go. (Navigation is
optional on the Uconnect® 8.4A system. See your dealer
to activate navigation at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say:
• For the 8.4A Uconnect® System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4AN Uconnect® System, say: “Navigate to
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® Access (8.4A/8.4AN)
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect® Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect® Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found
on the next page.
NOTE: Uconnect® Access is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States
and Alaska. Services can only be used where coverage is
available; see coverage map for details.
9-1-1 Call
Security Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn and Lights
Yelp® Search
Voice Texting
Roadside Assistance Call
Wi-Fi Hotspot***
**If vehicle is equipped.
***Extra charges apply.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the 8.4-inch
touchscreen.
2. If a pop-up message appears, press Register or go to
the Favorite Apps menu and press Uconnect® Regis-
tration.
3. Read through the registration instructions. Enter and
confirm your personal email address. Then press
Send.
4. Check your personal inbox for an email from
Uconnect® Access.
5. Click on the link inside the email within 72 hours and
complete the easy online registration process to create
a personal Mopar® Owner Connect account linked to
your vehicle.
Uconnect® Registration 8.4A/8.4AN
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)
Securely link your mobile device to your vehicle with the
Uconnect® Access App. Once you have downloaded the
App, you may start your vehicle or lock it from virtually
any distance. (Vehicle must be properly equipped with
factory-installed Remote Start.)
Download the Uconnect® Access App to a compatible
Apple® or Android® mobile devices. All you need to do is:
1. After registering with Uconnect® Access, log on to
your Mopar® Owner Connect account at
moparownerconnect.com.
2. On the Dashboard page, enter your mobile phone
number to receive a link to download the App on your
mobile device. Or go to iTunes®, or Google Play, and
search for the Uconnect® Access App.
3. To activate the App, enter your Mopar Owner Connect
user name and password and log in. Your vehicle is
then connected to your mobile device.
Mobile App
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)
1. To send a message, push the Phone button
. After
the beep, say the following command: “Send mes-
sage to John Smith.”
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect®
to process your message.
3. The Uconnect® system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect®
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
You must be registered with Uconnect® Access and have
a compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your
voice to send a personalized text message.
TIP:
• Not compatible with iPhone®.
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
illuminated to use the feature.
Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN)
Once registered with Uconnect® Access, you can use
your voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
1. Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “All Apps” button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
4. Once the YELP® home screen appears on the touch-
screen, push the VR button
, then say: “YELP
search.”
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5.
Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect® the place or business that you’d like
Uconnect® to find.
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4A/8.4AN)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link™ is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect® 8.4AN
system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
Yelp®
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Com-
mand.
Additional Information
© 2015 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
trademarks of Yelp.
Uconnect® System Support:
• U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400 or visit
DriveUconnect.com
• Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca
Mon. – Fri., 7:00 am – 12:00 am, ET
Sat., 8:00 am – 10:00 pm, ET
Sun., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Uconnect® Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241.
Please have your Uconnect® Security PIN ready when
you call.
SiriusXM Travel Link™
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES ................388
▫ Automatic Transmission ................388
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ..................389
▫ Normal Starting.......................389
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F
Or −29°C) ..........................391
▫ If Engine Fails To Start .................391
▫ After Starting ........................393
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .393
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............393
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock...............395
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .395
▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission .......395
䡵 AUTOSTICK ..........................403
▫ Operation ...........................403
䡵 SPORT MODE — WITHOUT PERFORMANCE
CONTROL............................405
䡵 ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED . .406
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES .........407
▫ Acceleration .........................407
5
▫ Traction ............................408
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER .............408
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ..................408
▫ Shallow Standing Water .................409
䡵 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING .............410
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED...................411
䡵 PARKING BRAKE ......................412
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM .......................414
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .415
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............415
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ............417
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............418
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........419
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) .................422
▫ Ready Alert Braking ...................424
▫ Rain Brake Support ....................424
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light ................424
▫ Synchronizing ESC ....................426
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............426
▫ Tire Markings ........................426
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........430
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........432
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........433
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ........438
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Tire Pressure ........................438
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................440
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .441
▫ Radial Ply Tires ......................441
▫ Tire Types ...........................442
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped .............444
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ...............444
▫ Tire Spinning ........................447
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................448
▫ Life Of Tire .........................448
▫ Replacement Tires .....................449
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .......451
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....452
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .453
▫ Premium System ......................455
▫ General Information....................459
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................459
▫ 3.6L Engine — If Equipped...............459
▫ 5.7L Engine — If Equipped...............460
▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................460
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............461
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .......461
▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................462
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................462
▫ Fuel System Cautions...................462
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............463
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................464
▫ E-85 General Information ...............464
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) ....................464
▫ Fuel Requirements ....................464
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles .............465
▫ Starting ............................466
▫ Cruising Range .......................466
▫ Replacement Parts ....................466
▫ Maintenance ........................466
䡵 ADDING FUEL ........................467
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release.........469
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING ....................470
▫ Vehicle Certification Label ...............470
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) .......471
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) .........471
▫ Overloading .........................471
▫ Loading ............................472
䡵 TRAILER TOWING .....................472
▫ Common Towing Definitions .............473
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification ...............476
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) ......................477
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ..............477
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
This feature allows the driver to oper-
ate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the Remote
Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Key Fob
is in the passenger compartment.
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the shift lever/gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK, the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds or three short pushes in a row with the vehicle
speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will
shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in
the ACC position until the shift lever/gear selector is
in PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF
position. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed
once, the DID will display a “Vehicle Not In Park”
message and the engine will remain running. Never
leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could
roll.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC, RUN.
To change the ignition switch positions without starting
the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps:
1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF position:
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
change the ignition to the ACC position.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition to the RUN position.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine
has started, ignite and damage the converter and
vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump-Starting” in “What To Do In Emergen-
cies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce-
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
3. Push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
is located near the air box.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the ve-
hicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
(Continued)
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in
the OFF position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both
on the shift lever and in the Driver Information Display
(DID).
To select a gear range, press the lock button on the shift
lever and move the lever rearward or forward. You must
also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or RE-
VERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Sys-
tem” in this section). Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, DRIVE, and MANUAL (Autostick) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the Autostick shift
control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further
information). Toggling the shift lever forward (-) or
rearward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position
(beside the DRIVE position) will manually select the
transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the
instrument cluster as M1, M2, M3, etc.
Automatic Transmission Shifter
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed for-
ward) it is probably in the MANUAL (AutoStick, +/-)
position (beside the DRIVE position). In MANUAL
(AutoStick) mode, the transmission gear is displayed in
the instrument cluster (as M1, M2, M3, etc.). Move the
shift lever to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for
access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
•
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the shift
lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leav-
ing the vehicle.
•
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the
brake pedal.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis-
sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
(Continued)
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift
lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must start the engine and also press the brake
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could
result.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
tion:
• When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the
shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking
brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must
leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain or traveling into strong head winds),
use the AutoStick shift control (refer to ⬙AutoStick⬙ in this
section for further information) to select a lower gear.
Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
below), transmission operation may be modified depend-
ing on engine and transmission temperature as well as
vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
MANUAL (M)
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE posi-
tion) enables full manual control of transmission shifting
(also known as AutoStick mode; refer to “AutoStick” in this
section for further information). Toggling the shift lever
forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL
(AutoStick) position will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as M1, M2, M3, etc.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission
may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will
inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and
indicate what actions may be necessary.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps.
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after en-
gine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOSTICK
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
Operation
When the shift lever is in the DRIVE (D) position, the
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between
the eight available gears. To activate AutoStick, move the
shift lever into the MANUAL (M) position (beside the
DRIVE position). The current transmission gear will be
displayed in the instrument cluster, along with a high-
lighted ⬙M⬙ (Manual) indication. When the shift lever is
in the MANUAL (M) position, tap the shift lever forward
(-) (or tap the (-) shift paddle on the steering wheel, if
equipped) to downshift the transmission to the next
lower gear, or tap the lever rearward (+) (or tap the (+)
shift paddle, if equipped) to command an upshift.
NOTE: Tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted shift
paddles (+/-), if equipped, while the shift lever is in
DRIVE, will activate a temporary AutoStick mode. Tap-
ping (-) to enter AutoStick mode will downshift the
transmission to the next lower gear, while using (+) to
enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear. The
current gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster,
but the ⬙M⬙ will not be highlighted. The transmission will
revert back to normal operation (if the shift lever remains
in DRIVE) after a period of time, depending on accelera-
tor pedal activity.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down
when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver (using the
shift lever, or the shift paddles [if equipped]), unless an
engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will
remain in the selected gear until another upshift or down-
shift is chosen, except as described below.
• In temporary AutoStick mode (shift lever in DRIVE),
the transmission will automatically shift up when
maximum engine speed is reached. If the accelerator is
fully depressed, the transmission will downshift when
possible (based on current vehicle speed and gear,
except 6.4L models). Lack of accelerator pedal activity
will cause the transmission to revert to automatic
operation.
• If normal AutoStick mode is engaged (shift lever in
MANUAL position), manual gear selection will be
maintained until the shift lever is returned to DRIVE,
or as described below. The transmission will not
upshift automatically at redline in this mode, nor will
downshifts be obtained if the accelerator pedal is
pressed to the floor.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second
gear. Starting out in second gear can be helpful in
snowy or icy conditions.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed (if equipped), or
holding the shift lever in the (-) position, will down-
shift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the
current speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is engaged.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the shift lever to the
DRIVE position, or press and hold the (+) shift paddle (if
equipped, and the shift lever is already in DRIVE) until
“D” is once again indicated in the instrument cluster. You
can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
SPORT MODE — WITHOUT PERFORMANCE
CONTROL
Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode feature. This
mode is a configuration set up for typical enthusiast
driving. The engine, transmission, and steering systems
are all set to their SPORT settings. Sport Mode will
provide improved throttle response and modified shift-
ing for an enhanced driving experience, as well the
greatest amount of steering feel. This mode may be
activated and deactivated by pressing the Sport button
on the instrument panel switch bank.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
For vehicles equipped with Drive Modes, Refer to “Per-
formance Control — If Equipped” within “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
chapter for further information.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an active on-demand
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system which makes available
optimum traction for a wide variety of road surface and
driving conditions. The system minimizes wheel slip by
automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear
wheels as necessary.
To maximize fuel economy, your AWD vehicle automati-
cally defaults to rear-wheel drive (RWD) when road and
environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is
unlikely to occur. When specific road and environmental
conditions require increased levels of road traction, the
vehicle automatically shifts into AWD mode. Automatic
AWD operation could be activated by outside tempera-
ture, wheel slip, or other predetermined conditions (there
may be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel
slip condition occurs). AWD can also be manually se-
lected by activating AutoStick mode (+/-), engaging
Sport Mode or activating the windshield wipers for an
extended period of time. Drive mode, RWD or AWD, can
be found in the Driver Information Display (DID). Refer
to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If the “SERVICE AWD SYSTEM” warning mes-
sage appears after engine start up, or during driving, it
means that the AWD system is not functioning properly
and that service is required. Refer to “Driver Information
Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the front differential and/or
the transfer case.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the rear (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
• Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip
Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate,
the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for im-
proved handling.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
(Continued)
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
sengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-
nated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the
ability to steer the vehicle manually.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected
through the Uconnect® System. Refer to ”Customer
Programmable Features” or “Performance Control — If
Equipped” within “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “SER-
VICE POWER STEERING” or the “POWER
STEERING ASSIST OFF – SERVICE SYSTEM”
message is displayed within the Driver Infor-
mation Display (DID), this indicates the vehicle needs to
be taken to the dealer for service. Refer to “Driver
Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever/gear
selector in the PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly press the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
Parking Brake
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-
sion is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-
plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever/gear selector in
PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift
lever/gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in
the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever/gear selector.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. There will be some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident
by increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the “Brake Warning Light”.
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
OFF) the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a high perfor-
mance braking system. The brake pads are a semi-
metallic compound, which offer superior fade resistance
for consistent operation. A compromise to using this type
of brake pad is that the brakes may produce more brake
dust and may squeal slightly under certain weather and
operating conditions (i.e., during light brake applica-
tions) this is considered normal conditions.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that include Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist System
(BAS), and the Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All four
of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
Also, your vehicle may be equipped with Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Ready Alert Braking, and Rain Brake Support.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”
the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents the
rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater control
of available braking forces applied to the rear axle.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is
working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-Lock:
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capa-
bility. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
(Continued)
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is
applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one
wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS
and ESC are in the “Sport Mode (Partial Off)” or ⬙Track
Mode (Full Off)⬙ mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC)” in this section for more information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
Brake Assist System (BAS)
This system complements the ABS by optimizing the
vehicle braking capability during emergency brake ma-
neuvers. This system detects an emergency braking situ-
ation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application
and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This
can help reduce braking distances.
Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you
must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the
stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those re-
sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa-
bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC
corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the
condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the condition of oversteer or understeer.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro-
priate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has two or three available operating
modes:
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When-
ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
conditions. The ESC should only be turned OFF for
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also
intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This
mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the
threshold for ESC activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than what ESC normally allows.
The “ESC Off” switch is located on the switch bank in the
center of the instrument panel. To enter the “Partial Off”
mode, momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch and the
⬙ESC off indicator light⬙ will illuminate. To turn the ESC
on again, momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch and
the ⬙ESC off indicator light⬙ will turn off.
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature de-
scribed in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys-
tem is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with
snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand,
or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial
Off” mode by momentarily pushing the “ESC Off”
switch. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn the ESC on again by momen-
tarily pushing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done
while the vehicle is in motion.
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability
features of ESC function normally. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS
is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is reduced.
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In
this mode, all TCS and ESC stability features are turned
OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the
“ESC Off” switch for five seconds while the vehicle is
stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a
chime will sound, the ⬙ESC Off Indicator Lamp⬙ will
illuminate, and the “ESC off” message may appear in the
Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Driver In-
formation Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information. To turn ESC ON
again, momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled. There-
fore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is
unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the
ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining
stability. ⴖESC Offⴖ mode is intended for off-highway
or off-road use only.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill.
The system will release brake pressure in proportion to
the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to
move in the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back-
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
Always remember the driver is responsible for brak-
ing the vehicle.
Towing With HSA
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas-
ing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle
on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK
and using the parking brake, it will roll down the
hill and could cause a collision with another ve-
hicle or object. Always remember to use the park-
ing brake while parking on a hill, and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
HSA Off
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done in
the Uconnect® Settings. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings⬙ in
⬙Understanding Your Instrument Panel⬙ for further infor-
mation.
Ready Alert Braking
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,
Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake
pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the
driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow
a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.
Rain Brake Support
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It only functions when the
windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode, it does not
function in the intermittent mode. When Rain Brake
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• Each time the ignition is cycled ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was cycled off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off or full off.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
Synchronizing ESC
If the power supply is interrupted (battery
disconnected or discharged), the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” may
illuminate with the engine running. If this
should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to the
left and then to the right. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” should go out. However, if
the light remains on, have the ESC and BAS checked at
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation
5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•
LL = Light load tire or
•
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure –
Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-
cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
650 lbs [295 kg]).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in overheating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
At least once a month:
•
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judge-
ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-
wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
mation.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
WARNING! (Continued)
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (2 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
• Distance driven.
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
this manual for more information relating to the Load
Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only.
• Due to limited clearance, use reduced size snow chains
or traction devices with a maximum projection of
6 mm beyond the tire profile on either P235/55R18 99V
or P225/60R18 99H tires.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will de-
crease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illu-
minates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the
“TPM Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will auto-
matically update and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn
off once the system receives the updated tire pressures.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “TPM
Telltale Light”. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
“TPM Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the
“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-
sure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to your local dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “TPM Telltale Light”.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module,
• Four TPM sensors,
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Driver
Information Display (DID), and
• TPM Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “TPM Telltale Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road
tires. In addition, the DID will display a “LOW TIRE”
message and a graphic showing the pressure values of
each tire with the low tire pressure values shown in a
different color. An ⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message will also
be displayed in the DID display.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate all of the tires with a low pressure condition (those
shown in a different color in the DID graphic) to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will
automatically update, the graphic display in the DID will
return the pressure values shown to their original color, and
the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn off. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the “TPM Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
DID will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for
a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is
not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “TPM Telltale Light” will no longer
flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
The DID will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
detected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message is then followed with a graphic display with
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres-
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle
position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the
“TPM Telltale Light” will remain ON and a chime will
sound. In addition, the graphic in the DID will still
display the low pressure values in a different color and
the ⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the DID will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the DID
will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF and the graphic in
the DID will display a new pressure value instead of
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2)
This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine — If Equipped
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high-quality unleaded “Regular” gaso-
line having an octane rating of 87 as speci-
fied by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane
“Premium” gasoline will not provide any benefit over
“Regular” gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-
ering service for the vehicle.
5.7L Engine — If Equipped
This engine is designed to meet all emissions
regulations and provide satisfactory fuel
economy and performance when using high-
quality unleaded gasoline having an octane
range of 87 to 89 as specified by the (R+M)/2
method. The use of 89 octane “Plus” gasoline is recom-
mended for optimum performance and fuel economy.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-
ering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im-
proved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability prob-
lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumi-
nate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than
10% ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing Metha-
nol or gasoline containing more than 10% ethanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be
covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
line containing up to 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per-
formance and damage the emissions control sys-
tem.
(Continued)
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to over-
heat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some
light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation sys-
tem to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve-
hicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Un-
leaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a
yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
ing materials lit or products that can cause spark in or
near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube
cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a
cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating
between E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
When switching fuel types:
• Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling.
• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or driveability problems during warm up.
NOTE:
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and
rough idle following start up may be experienced even
if the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formu-
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
FCA US Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended
that engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of Material Standard MS-6395 be used.
MS-6395 contains additional requirements, developed
during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional pro-
tection to FCA US LLC engines.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time
it takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may
improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be
experienced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per
liter and the driving range will decrease by approxi-
mately 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
Ethanol compatible service components are required.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (located in the
driver’s door map pocket).
2. Open the fuel filler door.
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
Fuel Filler Door
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refuel-
ing.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Maintain nozzle in filler for 5 seconds to allow nozzle
to drain.
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the
spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow for
emergency refueling with a gas can.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
Fuel Funnel
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the access cover (located on the left side inner
trim panel).
Access Cover
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
3. Pull the release cable.
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
the “Vehicle Certification Label”. This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as
indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
Release Cable
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
NOTE:
• Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to the
rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR and
GAWRs.
• Refer to the “Tire Placard” for your vehicle’s proper
tire pressure.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. The recommended tongue weight
is 10% to 15% of the vehicle’s GTW for a conventional
hitch. You must consider this as part of the load on your
vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat-
ible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec-
reational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Weight)
Max. Tongue Weight (See
Note)
3.6L Automatic 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
5.7L Automatic 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
it should never exceed the weight referenced on the “Tire
and Loading Information” placard. Refer to “Tire Safety
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer collisions.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury collision.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and it will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
WARNING! (Continued)
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard.
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-
lized. (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue
weight as a percentage of total trailer weight.)
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for information on tire pressures and for proper
tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for informa-
tion on tread wear indicators and for the proper
inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting And Operating” for information
on replacement tires and for the proper tire replace-
ment procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load
carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of
you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the
AutoStick shift control (if equipped) to manually select a
lower gear.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
AutoStick
• When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or
“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces-
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground,
or using a tow dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only
acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind an-
other vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels
OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........489
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............489
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ......................490
▫ Torque Specifications ...................490
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ..........492
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage .........492
▫ Preparations For Jacking ................494
▫ Jacking And Changing A Tire .............495
▫ Road Tire Installation ...................501
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED .........501
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage .................502
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .502
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions..........503
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit .........506
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES ...........512
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ..............512
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ................514
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............516
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel, below the radio.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
•
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 489
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m) M14 x 1.50 22 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
490 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Wheel Mounting Surface Torque Patterns
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 491
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
and spare tire.
NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to
access the jack.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
492 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire. 4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.
Opening The Access Panel Spare Tire Fastener
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 493
6. Remove the jack and lug wrench assembly from under
the spare tire. Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen
the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from the jack
assembly.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
Jack Fastener
494 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever/gear selector into PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the jacking posi-
tion. For example, if changing the right
front tire, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking And Changing A Tire
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 495
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
Jack Warning Label
496 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the lug nuts, use the lug wrench to pry the
center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to
loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with
the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange.
Jacking Locations
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 497
NOTE: If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide
the jack on its side and rotate it up into position.
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Location
498 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Mounting Spare Tire
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 499
NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in
“Starting and Operating” for additional warnings,
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its
use, and operation.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
10. Refer to Torque Specifications for proper lug nut
torque.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base
of the jack faces the front of the vehicle before
tightening down the fastener.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
500 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Refer to Torque Specifications for proper lug nut
torque.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread
can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g.,
screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire
Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to
approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 501
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located in the trunk.
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Location
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant Bottle 5 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Deflation Button 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 — Pressure Gauge 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
4 — Power Button 8 — Power Plug (located on the bottom
side of the Tire Service Kit)
502 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position for air pump operation only. Use the
Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and
to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6)
when selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power
Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at
the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to
“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 503
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
use. Always replace these components immediately at
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than
1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
504 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immedi-
ately with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as
possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 505
WARNING! (Continued)
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a phy-
sician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth imme-
diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition
in the OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
506 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running before
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 507
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1.
Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer
flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds).
As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the
Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar).
The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from
approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure
when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instru-
ment panel.
508 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Ve-
hicle.”
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con-
tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s inte-
rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
Tire Service Kit components which may cause
permanent damage to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph
(90 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure
to follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 509
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from
12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
510 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace-
ment”.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
of it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 511
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
engine compartment for jump-starting.
NOTE: The remote battery posts are viewed by standing
on the right side of the vehicle looking over the fender.
512 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and place the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
Remote Battery Post Locations
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 513
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
514 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-
cal spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 515
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Push and hold the lock button on the shift
lever. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the
least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
more than 2 seconds, you must push the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
516 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 517
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead
battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the console storage bin.
3. Remove plastic cover under the bin by using the slot
provided to access the Manual Park Release lever.
4. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the
tether strap up through the opening in the console
base.
Console Storage Bin
518 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the
lever, and disengage the lever locking tab by pushing
it to the right.
6. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged
position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and
rearward, until it locks in place in the vertical position.
The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed.
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
Locking Tab
Tether Strap
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 519
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the rear side)
rearward (away from the lever) to unlatch the lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and
down, to its original position, until the locking tab
snaps into place to secure the lever.
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the
lever is locked in its stowed position.
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console.
Reinstall the console storage bin.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condi-
tion
Wheels OFF
The Ground
RWD MODELS AWD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance
NOT ALLOWED
520 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Towing Condi-
tion
Wheels OFF
The Ground
RWD MODELS AWD MODELS
Wheel Lift or
Dolly Tow
Front NOT RECOMMENDED (but, if
used, same limitations as above)
NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT RECOMMENDED NOT RECOMMENDED, but, if
used:
• Ignition in ON/RUN position
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
(NOT in Park)
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to ⬙Manual Park Release⬙ in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
for towing.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 521
CAUTION!
• DO NOT use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• The manufacturer does not recommend towing this
vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may
occur.
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ACC or ON/RUN
position, not in the LOCK/OFF position.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, AWD
models can also be towed with the ignition in the
ON/RUN position, the transmission in NEUTRAL (not
in PARK!), and the rear wheels OFF the ground with no
limitation on speed or distance. Since the ignition MUST
be in the ON/RUN position to tow in this manner, AWD
vehicles must be towed with ALL FOUR wheels OFF the
ground (e.g. on a flatbed truck) if the Key Fob is
unavailable.
CAUTION!
• Towing this vehicle using any other method can
cause severe transmission and/or transfer case dam-
age.
• Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
522 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis-
sion is operable, this vehicle may be flat towed (with all
four wheels on the ground) under the following condi-
tions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
30 miles (48 km), then the only acceptable method of
towing is with a flatbed truck.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Without The Key Fob
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. The only
approved method of towing without the Key Fob is with
a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 523
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L ..........527
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L ..........528
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .529
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ..........................529
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................531
䡵 DEALER SERVICE ......................531
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........532
▫ Engine Oil ..........................533
▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................536
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................537
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ...............537
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............539
▫ A/C Air Filter .......................541
▫ Body Lubrication .....................543
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ...............543
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ..................544
▫ Exhaust System ......................544
▫ Cooling System ......................547
▫ Brake System ........................553
7
▫ Automatic Transmission ................555
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped .....557
▫ Rear Axle ...........................558
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................558
䡵 FUSES ..............................566
▫ Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses) .....567
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses) .....572
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE ....................579
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS .................579
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ..................581
▫ Front Low/High Beam Headlamp And Park/Turn
Lamp — Models With Halogen Headlamps . . .581
▫ Front Low/High Beam Headlamp And Park/Turn
Lamp — Models With High Intensity Discharge
Headlamps (HID) .....................582
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp ............583
▫ Front Fog Lamp ......................583
▫ Backup Lamps........................583
▫ Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL). . .583
▫ License Lamp ........................583
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ....................584
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS ..............................585
▫ Engine .............................585
▫ Chassis ............................587
526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1—
Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery
Post)
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1—
Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 7 — Engine Oil Fill
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 5 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery
Post)
6 — Air Cleaner Filter 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”. It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emissions control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
to the I/M station.
530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready
or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle
operation you should have your vehicle serviced before
going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your
vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure
the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by
the use of non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance and repairs
will not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level — 3.6L Engine
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of oil when the reading is
at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Checking Oil Level — 5.7L Engine
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 quart (1.0
liter) of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the
“SAFE” range will result in an oil level at the top of the
“SAFE” range on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
months, whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA US
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, Shell
Helix® or equivalent is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com-
partment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to
FCA US Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®,
Shell Helix® or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20
engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 5.7L Engine
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent such as
Pennzoil® or Shell Helix® is recommended for all oper-
ating temperatures. This engine oil improves low tem-
perature starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine
oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil
filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
operation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel
Saver Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for further information.
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump starting. Refer to “Jump-
Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
Battery Location
538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539
WARNING! (Continued)
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
— If Equipped
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-
fluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmen-
tal Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product
with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However,
the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning ser-
vice be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing
the retaining clips.
2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover.
Access Door
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541
3. Remove the used filter.
4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
5. Close the filter access cover.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Filter Access Cover A/C Air Filter
542 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-
sary.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 543
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon (4 liters) of
washer fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid”
appears in the Driver Information Display (DID).
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
544 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 545
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or cycle the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is tempera-
ture controlled and can start at any time the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the radiator for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
(Continued)
548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Ma-
terial Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34° F
(−37° C) are anticipated.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE:
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no
need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap unless
checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or
replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As
long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the
coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032
should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-
ing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis-
sions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the brake system warning light indicates system fail-
ure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per-
forming underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require-
ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
(Continued)
554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should
be used.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmis-
sion has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis-
sion damage.
556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How-
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped
The all wheel drive system consists of a transfer case and
front differential. The exterior surface of these compo-
nents should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks.
Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible.
The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is located in
the middle of the rear housing. To inspect the transfer
case fluid level, remove the fill/inspection plug. The
fluid level should be even with the bottom of the hole.
Use this plug to add fluid as required.
The front differential fill plug is located on the outer
cover near the halfshaft attachment. To inspect the differ-
ential fluid level, remove the fill plug. The fluid level
should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the
hole.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557
Fluid Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Rear Axle
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the
axle. The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill
hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Change Axle Fluid
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami-
nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi-
tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chlo-
ride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or
control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and
mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. These products and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire
and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561
or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-
nently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 563
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break-
age than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 565
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
with the cupholder in the center console.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap-
propriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property dam-
age.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
(Continued)
566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays.
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
(Continued)
Front Power Distribution Center
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 567
CAUTION! (Continued)
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
1 – – Fuse – Spare
2 40 Amp Green – Radiator Fan #1 – If Equipped
3 50 Amp Red – Power Steering #1 / Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged)
– If Equipped
4 30 Amp Pink – Starter
5 40 Amp Green – Electronic Stability Control
6 30 Amp Pink – Electronic Stability Control
568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
7 – – Fuse – Spare
8 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run / ACC # 2
9 – 20 Amp Yellow All-Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped
10 – 10 Amp Red Security – If Equipped / Under hood Lamp – Police
11 – 20 Amp Yellow Horns
12 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
13 – – Fuse – Spare
14 – – Fuse – Spare
15 – 20 Amp Yellow Left HID – If Equipped
16 – 20 Amp Yellow Right HID – If Equipped
18 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan #2 – If Equipped
19 50 Amp Red – Power Steering #2 / Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged)
20 30 Amp Pink – Wiper Motor
21 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washers – If Equipped / Police Feed
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 569
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
22 40 Amp Green / 20
Amp Blue – Police
– Engine Cooling Pump (6.2L Supercharged) / Police
Bat Feed # 3 – If Equipped
23 20 Amp Blue – Police Bat Feed#1–IfEquipped
24 20 Amp Blue – Police Bat Feed#3–IfEquipped
28 – – Fuse – Spare
29 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module (LA/LD Police)
30 – – Fuse – Spare
31 – 25 Amp Clear Engine Module
32 – – Fuse – Spare
33 – – Fuse – Spare
34 – 25 Amp Clear Powertrain #1
35 – 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain #2
36 – 10 Amp Red Anti-Lock Brake Module
37 – 10 Amp Red Engine Controller/Rad Fan Relays – If Equipped
38 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
570 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
39 – 10 Amp Red Power Steering Module/AC Clutch Relay
48 – 10 Amp Red AWD Module/Front Axle Disconnect (LX) / Adaptive
Cruise (LA) – If Equipped
49 – – Fuse – Spare
50 – – Fuse – Spare
51 – 20 Amp Yellow Vacuum Pump
52 – 5 Amp Tan Adaptive Cruise (LD/LX) – If Equipped
53 – – Fuse – Spare
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 571
Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
(Continued)
Opening The Access Cover
Rear Power Distribution Center
572 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
2 60 Amp Yellow — Front PDC Feed #1
3 — — Fuse – Spare
4 60 Amp Yellow — Front PDC Feed #2
5 30 Amp Pink — Sunroof / Dome Lamp – Police
6 40 Amp Green — Exterior Lighting #1
7 40 Amp Green — Exterior Lighting #2
8 30 Amp Pink — Interior Lighting
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 573
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
9 40 Amp Green — Power Locks
10 30 Amp Pink — Driver Door Control Module
11 30 Amp Pink — Passenger Door Control Module
12 — 20 Amp Yellow Dual USB Center Console Rear/Cigar Lighter IP – If
Equipped
15 40 Amp Green — HVAC Blower
16 20 Amp Blue — Left Spot Lamp – Police
17 — — Fuse – Spare
18 30 Amp Pink — Mod Network Interface – Police
19 — — Fuse — Spare
20 — — Fuse — Spare
21 30 Amp Pink (6.2L
Supercharged)
25 Amp Clear (LD
STD)
— Fuel Pump (6.2L Supercharged)
Fuel Pump (LD STD)
574 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
22 — 20 Amp Yellow –
Police
10 Amp Red – LA
Right Spot Lamp – Police
Integrated Center Stack – LA
23 — 10 Amp Red Fuel Door/Diagnostic Port
24 — 15 Amp Blue Integrated Center Stack – LD/LX
25 — 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor
26 — 15 Amp Blue –
LD/LX
25 Amp Clear – LA
30 Amp Green –
LA 6.2L Super-
charged
Transmission / Electronic Shift Module (LD/LX)
Fuel Pump (LA)
Fuel Pump (LA 6.2L Supercharged)
27 — 25 Amp Clear Amplifier – If Equipped
31 — 25 Amp Breaker Power Seats
32 — 15 Amp Blue HVAC Module/Cluster
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 575
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
33 — 15 Amp Blue Ignition Switch/RF hub Module/Steering Column
Lock-LX If Equipped
34 — 10 Amp Red Steering Column Module/Clock/Spare – Police
35 — 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
36 — 15 Amp Blue Electronic Exhaust Valve – If Equipped
37 — 20 Amp Yellow Radio
38 — 15 Amp Blue –
LD/LX
20 Amp Yellow –
LA
Console Power Outlet/Console Media Hub (LD/LX)
Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest/Console Media Hub
(LA)
40 — — Fuse — Spare
41 — — Fuse — Spare
42 30 Amp Pink — Rear Defrost
43 — 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats/Steering Wheel Module
44 — 10 Amp Red Park Assist / Blind Spot / Rear View Camera
576 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
45 — 15 Amp Blue Cluster / Rearview Mirror / Compass(LDLX)/
Humidity Sensor
46 — — Fuse — Spare
47 — 10 Amp Red Adaptive Front Lighting / Auto High BEAM / Day
Time Running Lamps- If Equipped
48 — 20 Amp Yellow Active Suspension – SRT
49 — — Fuse — Spare
50 — — Fuse — Spare
51 — 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats – If Equipped
52 — 10 Amp Red Heated Cupholders/Rear Heated Seat Switches – If
Equipped
53 — 10 Amp Red HVAC Module/In Car Temperature Sensor
54 — 10 Amp Red Airbag Module (LA)
55 — — Fuse — Spare
56 — — Fuse — Spare
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 577
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
57 — — Fuse — Spare
58 — 10 Amp Red Airbag Module (LD/LX)
59 — 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals – Police
60 — 5 Amp Tan Heated Washer Nozzles (LD)
61 — 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter (LA) – If Equipped
62 — — Fuse — Spare
63 — — Fuse — Spare
64 — 25 Amp Breaker Rear Windows (LD/LX)
65 — 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
66 — — Fuse — Spare
67 — 10 Amp Red Rain and Light Sensor/Sunroof
68 — 10 Amp Red Dual USB Power Outlet – R/A Sense (LD/LX) Rear
Sunshade (LD/LX)
69 — — Fuse — Spare
70 — — Fuse — Spare
578 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp 562
Overhead Console Reading Lamp 578
Visor Vanity Lamps A6220
Glove Box Lamp – If Equipped 194
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 579
Bulb Number
Door Courtesy 562
Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140
Center High-Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cup Holder LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Low/High Beam Headlamp (Standard Halogen Bi
Function Projector)
HIR2
Low/High Beam Headlamp – High Intensity Dis-
charge (Premium HID Bi Function Projector)
D3S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Park/Turn Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamp – If Equipped LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Side Marker LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
580 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Bulb Number
Rear Stop/Turn Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Side Marker LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Backup Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
License LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Front Low/High Beam Headlamp And Park/Turn
Lamp — Models With Halogen Headlamps
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp
assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Remove the large dust cap from the headlamp hous-
ing by turning it counterclockwise, turn the bulb
counterclockwise and remove.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 581
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the head-
lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
5. Reinstall the dust cap.
Front Low/High Beam Headlamp And Park/Turn
Lamp — Models With High Intensity Discharge
Headlamps (HID)
HID Headlamps
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlight switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electro-
cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
582 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
The Side Markers use LED sources that are not service-
able separately. The Side Markers must be replaced as an
assembly, see your authorized dealer.
Front Fog Lamp
The Front Fog Lamps use LED sources that are not
serviceable separately. The Front Fog Lamp must be
replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
Backup Lamps
The Backup Lamps use LED sources that are not service-
able separately. The Applique must be replaced as an
assembly, see your authorized dealer.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL Lamp uses LED sources that are not service-
able separately. The CHMSL Lamp must be replaced as
an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
License Lamp
The License Lamp uses an LED source that is not
serviceable separately. The License Lamp must be re-
placed as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 583
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines 18.5 Gallons 69.9 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.6 Liter Engine – We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent.
10 Quarts 9.5 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine without Severe Duty II Cooling System – We rec-
ommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula.
14.5 Quarts 13.9 Liters
584 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
U.S. Metric
5.7 Liter Engine with Severe Duty II Cooling System – We recom-
mend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula.
15 Quarts 14.3 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting
the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-6395 such as
MOPAR®, Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler
cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 585
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane.
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable – 89 Octane Recommended.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should
not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technol-
ogy (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “glob-
ally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT
engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system
will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
586 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – 8-Speed Transmission Use only MOPAR® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF™ Automatic
Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the
correct fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 and
SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then
DOT 4 is acceptable.
Front Axle We recommend you use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear Lu-
bricant SAE 75W90 (API GL-5).
Rear Axle We recommend you use MOPAR® OD Synthetic Gear
Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5).
Transfer Case We recommend you use MOPAR® Transfer Case Lu-
bricant for BorgWarner 44–40.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 587
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re-
quired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi-
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
The “Oil Change Required” message will be displayed in
the DID and a single chime will sound, indicating that an
oil change is necessary.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Driver Informa-
tion Dispay (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
590 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This
type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering (if equipped) and
fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
•
Rotate the tires.
Rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled service
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake
•
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 591
Maintenance Chart
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals,
and replace if necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle
fluid (All Wheel Drive Only).
XX X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary. X X X X X X X
Adjust park brake on vehicles equipped with four
wheel disc brakes.
XXX X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid (All Wheel Drive Only). X X X
592 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years
or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
XX
Inspect the transfer case fluid. Change the transfer
case fluid; if using your vehicle for any of the fol-
lowing: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
trailer towing. (All Wheel Drive Only).
XX
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 593
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Change the rear axle fluid and on models
equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the
front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
trailer towing.
XX X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
594 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 595
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .......................599
▫ Prepare For The Appointment.............599
▫ Prepare A List ........................599
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............599
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............599
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center ............600
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .........600
▫ In Mexico Contact .....................601
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)...................601
▫ Service Contract ......................601
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION .............602
䡵 MOPAR®PARTS.......................603
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............603
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.......................603
▫ In Canada ...........................603
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............604
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 599
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 423-6343
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
600 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 601
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
602 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
MOPAR® PARTS
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 603
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward lan-
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
quaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included
are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.
604 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 605
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
606 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
INDEX 607
About Your Brakes .....................412, 414
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ................415
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .172
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............549
Adding Fuel .............................467
Adding Washer Fluid ......................544
Additives, Fuel ...........................462
Adjustable Pedals .........................165
Airbag...............................57, 58
Air Bag
Advance Front Air Bag ....................58
Air Bag Components .....................57
Air Bag Operation .......................60
Air Bag Warning Light ..................69, 70
Driver Knee Air Bag ......................62
Enhanced Accident Response ................68
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................72
FrontAirBag ........................57, 58
If A Deployment Occurs ...................67
Knee Impact Bolsters .....................61
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ............71
Side Air Bags ...........................62
Transporting Pets ........................93
Air bag Deployment ........................57
Air bag Light.....................69, 70, 97, 255
Air bag Maintenance........................71
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .537
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................539
Air Conditioning ......................345, 353
Air Conditioning Controls ...................345
Air Conditioning Filter ..................363, 541
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips...........362, 364
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ..............539, 540
Air Conditioning System .............345, 360, 539
Air Pressure, Tires.........................440
Alarm
Arm The System ........................18
Alarm Light .............................255
608 INDEX
Alarm, Panic .............................23
Alarm (Security Alarm) ......................18
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ................18
All Wheel Drive (AWD) .................406, 557
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)...............548, 584
Disposal ..............................551
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................415
Anti-Lock Warning Light ....................255
Appearance Care .........................558
Arming System (Security Alarm) ...............18
Assist, Hill Start ..........................422
Auto Down Power Windows ..................39
Automatic Door Locks ......................31
Automatic Headlights ......................147
Automatic High Beams .....................148
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC). . . .345, 353, 360
Automatic Transmission .................395, 557
Adding Fluid .......................557, 587
Autostick .............................403
Fluid and Filter Changes ..................557
Fluid Change ..........................557
Fluid Level Check ...................555, 556
Fluid Type ............................587
Special Additives .......................556
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode .......401
Autostick ...............................403
Auto Unlock, Doors ........................31
Auto Up Power Windows ....................39
Axle Fluid ..............................587
Axle Lubrication ..........................587
Battery.................................537
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ........23
Location ..............................537
Belts, Seat ...............................96
Body Mechanism Lubrication .................543
B-Pillar Location ..........................433
10
INDEX 609
Brake Assist System .......................418
Brake Control System, Electronic ..............415
Brake Fluid .............................587
Brake, Parking ...........................412
Brakes .................................414
Brake System .........................414, 553
Anti-Lock (ABS) ........................415
Fluid Check ........................554, 587
Master Cylinder ........................554
Parking ..............................412
Warning Light ......................255, 414
Brake/Transmission Interlock.................395
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle .........94
Brightness, Interior Lights ...................156
Bulb Replacement......................579, 581
Bulbs, Light...........................98, 579
Camera, Rear ............................220
Capacities, Fluid ..........................584
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ...........................535
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ................550
Carbon Monoxide Warning ................95, 463
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) ....................470
Car Washes .............................559
Cellular Phone ...........................344
Certification Label.........................470
Chains, Tire .............................451
Changing A Flat Tire .......................492
Chart, Tire Sizing .........................428
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .529
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............95
Checks, Safety ............................95
Child Restraint ............................73
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ...........................78
Center Seat LATCH ......................85
Child Restraints .........................73
610 INDEX
Child Seat Installation .....................90
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt ........86
Infants And Child Restraints ................76
Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint ....85
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......80
Older Children And Child Restraints ..........76
Seating Positions ........................79
Child Safety Locks .........................32
Clean Air Gasoline ........................460
Cleaning
Wheels ...............................561
Climate Control ..........................345
Automatic ............................345
Coin Holder .............................243
Cold Weather Operation ....................391
Compact Spare Tire........................445
Connector
UCI.................................342
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ..........342
Console, Floor ...........................243
Contract, Service ..........................601
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ...........550
Cooling System...........................547
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............549
Coolant Capacity .......................584
Coolant Level ......................547, 551
Disposal of Used Coolant .................551
Drain, Flush, and Refill ...................548
Inspection ............................551
Points to Remember .....................552
Pressure Cap ..........................550
Radiator Cap ..........................550
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......548, 584, 585
Corrosion Protection .......................558
Cruise Control (Speed Control)................172
Cupholders ..........................241, 566
Customer Assistance .......................599
10
INDEX 611
Customer Programmable Features ..........284, 286
Data Recorder, Event .......................72
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights.............157
Daytime Running Lights ....................150
Dealer Service............................531
Deck Lid, Emergency Release .................43
Deck Lid, Power Release .....................42
Defroster, Rear Window.....................246
Defroster, Windshield .......................97
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ..................158
Diagnostic System, Onboard .................529
Dimmer Switch, Headlight...................153
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ...........................533
Disabled Vehicle Towing ....................520
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................551
Door Locks
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors ......32
Door Locks ..........................22, 29
KeyFob...............................29
Remote ...............................29
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ................29
Door Locks, Automatic ......................31
Driver Information Display
DID .............................267, 273
Instrument Cluster Display .............267, 273
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water ................................408
E-85 Fuel ...............................464
Electrical Power Outlets.....................237
Electric Rear Window Defrost.................246
Electric Remote Mirrors .....................116
Electronic Brake Control System ...............415
612 INDEX
Brake Assist System .....................418
Traction Control System ...................417
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) ......567
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .....167, 172
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..............419
Emergency Deck Lid Release ..................43
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ................516
Jacking ...............................492
Jump Starting ..........................512
Overheating ...........................489
Towing ..............................520
Emergency Trunk Release ....................43
Emission Control System Maintenance ..........529
Engine .................................528
Air Cleaner ...........................537
Block Heater ..........................393
Break-In Recommendations .................94
Checking Oil Level ......................533
Compartment .......................527, 528
Compartment Identification ................527
Coolant (Antifreeze) ..................547, 585
Cooling ..............................547
Exhaust Gas Caution ..................95, 463
Fails to Start ...........................391
Flooded, Starting .......................391
Fuel Requirements ......................459
Jump Starting ..........................512
Oil...........................533, 584, 585
Oil Filler Cap ..........................535
Oil Filter .............................536
Oil Selection .......................534, 584
Oil Synthetic ..........................536
Overheating ...........................489
Starting ..............................388
Temperature Gauge ......................255
Engine
Oil Viscosity .......................535
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ...................535
10
INDEX 613
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............68
Entry System, Illuminated ....................20
Ethanol ................................461
Event Data Recorder ........................72
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................95, 463
Exhaust System ........................95, 544
Exterior Folding Mirrors ....................115
Exterior Lighting..........................146
Exterior Lights ............................98
Filters
Air Cleaner ...........................537
Air Conditioning ....................363, 541
Engine Oil .........................536, 585
Engine Oil Disposal .....................536
Flashers ................................489
Hazard Warning ........................489
Turn Signal ......................98, 152, 255
Flash-To-Pass ............................153
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range .........................466
Engine Oil ............................465
Fuel Requirements ......................464
Maintenance ...........................466
Replacement Parts .......................466
Starting ..............................466
Flooded Engine Starting ....................391
Floor Console ............................243
Fluid, Brake .............................587
Fluid Capacities ..........................584
Fluid Leaks ..............................99
Fluid Level Checks ........................558
Automatic Transmission ..................556
Brake ................................554
Cooling System .........................547
Engine Oil ............................533
Transfer Case ..........................557
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ...........585
614 INDEX
Fog Lights ...........................151, 255
Folding Rear Seat .........................139
Forward Collision Warning ..................199
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................516
Fuel...................................459
Additives .............................462
Clean Air .............................460
Ethanol ..............................461
Gasoline ..............................459
Gauge ...............................255
Materials Added ........................462
Methanol .............................461
Octane Rating ......................459, 585
Requirements ..........................459
Specifications ..........................585
Tank Capacity ..........................584
Fuel, Flexible ............................464
Fuses ..................................566
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) .........225, 231
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................460
Gasoline (Fuel) ...........................459
Gasoline, Reformulated .....................460
Gauges
Coolant Temperature .....................255
Fuel .................................255
Odometer .............................255
Speedometer ..........................255
Tachometer ............................255
Gear Ranges .............................397
Glass Cleaning ...........................565
Gross Axle Weight Rating ................471, 473
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ..............471, 473
GVWR .................................471
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water .........................408
10
INDEX 615
Hazard Warning Flasher ....................489
Headlights ..............................582
Automatic ............................147
Cleaning .............................564
Delay ................................149
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .........153
Lights On Reminder .....................150
On With Wipers .....................148, 160
Passing ..............................153
Switch ...............................146
Time Delay ............................149
Washers ..............................544
Headlight Washers ........................544
Head Restraints ..........................136
Head Rests..............................136
Heated Mirrors ...........................117
Heated Seats.............................131
Heater .................................345
Heater, Engine Block .......................393
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .153
Hill Start Assist...........................422
Hitches
Trailer Towing .........................476
Holder, Coin.............................243
Hood Release ............................145
Ignition
Key..................................12
Illuminated Entry ..........................20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ....................16
Information Center, Vehicle ..................264
Inside Rearview Mirror .....................108
Instrument Cluster ..................253, 254, 255
Instrument Panel and Controls ................252
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............565
Interior Appearance Care....................563
Interior Lights ...........................155
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers).............158
616 INDEX
Introduction ..............................4
iPod®/USB/MP3 Control ...................342
Jack Location ............................492
Jack Operation ...........................492
Jump Starting ............................512
KeyFob.................................13
Arm The Alarm .........................18
Lock The Doors .........................22
Panic Alarm ............................23
Programming Additional Key Fobs .........17, 23
Programming Additional Transmitters .......17, 23
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ................20
Unlatch The Trunk .......................22
Unlock The Doors .......................21
Key-In Reminder ..........................14
Keyless Enter-N-Go .....................33, 389
Enter The Trunk .........................22
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ............22, 295, 316
Passive Entry ...........................33
Passive Entry Programming ..........33, 295, 316
Unlock From The Driver’s Side ..............21
Unlock From The Passenger Side .............21
Keyless Entry System .......................20
Keyless Go...............................12
Key, Replacement ..........................17
Keys ...................................12
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................16
Lane Change and Turn Signals ................152
Lane Change Assist ........................153
LaneSense ..............................204
Lap/Shoulder Belts.........................47
Latches .................................98
Lead Free Gasoline ........................459
Leaks, Fluid ..............................99
Life of Tires .............................448
10
INDEX 617
Light Bulbs ...........................98, 579
Lights ...............................98, 146
Airbag .......................69, 70, 97, 255
Alarm ...............................255
Anti-Lock .............................255
Automatic Headlights ....................147
Brake Assist Warning ....................424
Brake Warning ......................255, 414
Bulb Replacement .......................581
Daytime Running .......................150
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .............152, 153
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator .....424
Exterior ...............................98
Fog..............................151, 255
Headlights .........................146, 582
Headlights On Reminder ..................150
Headlights On With Wipers .............148, 160
Headlight Switch .......................146
High Beam ........................153, 255
High Beam Indicator .....................255
High Beam/Low Beam Select ...............153
Illuminated Entry ........................20
Instrument Cluster ...................146, 255
Intensity Control ........................156
Interior ..............................155
License ..............................583
Lights On Reminder .....................150
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........255
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) ...........157
Passing ..............................153
Reading ...........................153, 223
Seat Belt Reminder ......................255
Security Alarm .........................255
Service ...........................579, 581
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .255
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .........255,
453
Traction Control ........................424
Turn Signal ......................98, 152, 255
618 INDEX
Vanity Mirror ..........................118
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) ......255
Loading Vehicle .......................470, 472
Capacities ............................472
Tires ................................433
Load Leveling System ......................247
Locks ..................................29
Automatic Door .........................31
Auto Unlock ...........................31
Child Protection .........................32
Door .................................29
Power Door ............................30
Low Tire Pressure System ...................453
Lubrication, Body .........................543
Lug Nuts ...............................490
Maintenance Free Battery....................537
Maintenance Procedures ....................532
Maintenance Schedule ......................590
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .255, 530
Manual, Service ..........................604
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ....................554
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) ...............140
Memory Seat ............................140
Memory Seats and Radio ....................140
Methanol ...............................461
Mirrors ................................108
Electric Powered ........................116
Electric Remote .........................116
Exterior Folding ........................115
Heated ...............................117
Outside ..............................114
Rearview .............................108
Vanity ...............................118
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................453
MOPAR® Parts .......................531, 603
MTBE/ETBE ............................461
10
INDEX 619
Multi-Function Control Lever .................152
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..................94
Occupant Restraints ........................44
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel).............459, 585
Odometer...............................255
Trip.................................255
Oil, Engine .......................267, 533, 585
Capacity .............................584
Change Interval ........................534
Checking .............................533
Dipstick ..............................533
Disposal ..............................536
Filter .............................536, 585
Filter Disposal .........................536
Identification Logo ......................534
Materials Added to ......................536
Recommendation ....................534, 584
Synthetic .............................536
Viscosity ..........................535, 584
Oil Filter, Change .........................536
Oil Filter, Selection ........................536
Onboard Diagnostic System ..................529
Operating Precautions ......................529
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors ...................114
Overheating, Engine .......................489
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ..........4,604
Paint Care ..............................558
Panic Alarm ..............................23
Parking Brake............................412
ParkSense® System, Rear....................210
Passing Light ............................153
Passive Entry .............................33
Pedals, Adjustable.........................165
Performance .............................275
620 INDEX
Pets....................................93
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ..........434
Power
Brakes ...............................414
Deck Lid Release ........................42
Distribution Center (Fuses) ................572
Door Locks ............................30
Mirrors ..............................116
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ...........237
Seats ................................128
Sunroof ..............................233
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ............163
Windows ..............................38
Power Steering Fluid.......................587
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ................54
Preparation for Jacking .....................494
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................54
Programmable Electronic Features .............286
Programmable Features..................284, 286
Radial Ply Tires ..........................441
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ...........550
Radio Operation ..........................344
Radio Remote Controls .....................343
Radio (Sound Systems) .....................342
Rain Sensitive Wiper System .................161
Rear Axle (Differential) .....................558
Rear Camera ............................220
Rear Cupholder ..........................241
Rear ParkSense System .....................210
Rear Seat, Folding .........................139
Rear Window Defroster .....................246
Rear Window Features .....................246
Recorder, Event Data .......................72
Recreational Towing .......................485
Reformulated Gasoline .....................460
Refrigerant ..............................540
10
INDEX 621
Reminder, Lights On .......................150
Reminder, Seat Belt.........................46
Remote Control
Starting System .........................26
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Arm The Alarm .........................18
FCC General Information ..................25
Lock The Doors .........................22
Panic Alarm ............................23
Programming Additional Key Fobs .........17, 23
Programming Additional Transmitters .......17, 23
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ................20
Unlatch The Trunk .......................22
Unlock The Doors .......................21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........343
Remote Starting
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features .297, 319
Uconnect Settings ....................297, 319
Remote Starting System......................26
Remote Trunk Release.......................42
Replacement Bulbs ........................579
Replacement Keys .........................17
Replacement Parts.........................531
Replacement Tires .........................449
Reporting Safety Defects ....................603
Restraint, Head...........................136
Restraints, Child...........................73
Restraints, Occupant ........................44
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck .................516
Rotation, Tires ...........................452
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ..................96
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .................98
Safety Defects, Reporting ....................603
Safety, Exhaust Gas.........................95
Safety Information, Tire .....................426
Safety Tips ...............................95
Schedule, Maintenance .....................590
622 INDEX
Seat Belt
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ...........55
Energy Management Feature ................55
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................47
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............52
Pregnant Women ........................54
Seat Belt Extender .......................53
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................54
Seat Belt Reminder .......................46
Seat Belt System .........................44
Seat Belt Maintenance ......................565
Seat Belt Reminder .........................46
Seat Belts .............................45, 96
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........52
Child Restraint ..........................73
Extender ..............................53
Front Seat ........................45, 47, 50
Inspection .............................96
Operating Instructions ....................50
Pregnant Women ........................54
Pretensioners ...........................54
Rear Seat ..............................47
Reminder .............................255
Untwisting Procedure .....................52
Seats ..................................127
Adjustment ...........................127
Easy Entry ............................144
Head Restraints ........................136
Heated ...............................131
Height Adjustment ......................128
Memory ..............................140
Power ...............................128
Rear Folding ..........................139
Seatback Release ........................139
Tilting ...............................128
Security Alarm ............................18
Arm The System ........................18
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze)...............585
10
INDEX 623
SENTRY KEY
FCC General Information ..................17
Key Programming .......................17
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ....................16
Sentry Key Replacement .....................17
Service Assistance .........................599
Service Contract ..........................601
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .255
Service Manuals ..........................604
Shifting ................................393
Automatic Transmission ..................393
Shoulder Belts ............................47
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage ................52
Side View Mirror Adjustment .................114
Signals, Turn.......................98, 152, 255
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)...................451
Snow Tires ..............................443
Spare Tire ........................445, 446, 492
Spark Plugs .............................585
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) .........................585
Oil..................................585
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ............167, 172
Speedometer.............................255
Starting..............................26, 388
Automatic Transmission ..................388
Cold Weather ..........................391
Engine Fails to Start .....................391
Remote ...............................26
Starting and Operating .....................388
Starting Procedures ........................388
Steering
Column Controls .......................152
Column Lock ..........................162
Tilt Column ........................162, 163
Wheel, Heated .........................164
Wheel, Tilt .........................162, 163
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............343
624 INDEX
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .343
Storage ................................579
Storage, Vehicle .......................362, 579
Storing Your Vehicle .......................579
Stuck, Freeing............................516
Sunglasses Storage ........................224
Sun Roof ...............................233
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ..........58
Synthetic Engine Oil .......................536
System, Remote Starting .....................26
Tachometer..............................255
Telescoping Steering Column..............162, 163
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC).......353, 360
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant ............255
Tilt Steering Column....................162, 163
Time Delay, Headlight ......................149
Tire and Loading Information Placard .......433, 434
Tire Markings ............................426
Tires.............................98, 438, 605
Aging (Life of Tires) .....................448
Air Pressure ...........................438
Chains ...............................451
Changing .............................492
Compact Spare .........................445
General Information .....................438
High Speed ...........................441
Inflation Pressures .......................440
Jacking ...........................492, 494
Life of Tires ...........................448
Load Capacity ......................433, 434
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ............453
Pressure Warning Light ...................255
Quality Grading ........................605
Radial ...............................441
Replacement ...........................449
Rotation ..............................452
Safety ............................426,
438
10
INDEX 625
Sizes ................................428
Snow Tires ............................443
Spare Tire .............................492
Spinning .............................447
Trailer Towing .........................480
Tread Wear Indicators ....................448
Tire Safety Information .....................426
Tire Service Kit ...........................501
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ................477
To Open Hood ...........................145
Towing ................................472
Disabled Vehicle ........................520
Guide ...............................477
Recreational ...........................485
Weight ...............................477
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome ...........485
Traction ................................407
Traction Control ..........................417
Trailer Towing ...........................472
Cooling System Tips .....................485
Hitches ..............................476
Minimum Requirements ..................479
Tips.................................484
Trailer and Tongue Weight .................477
Wiring ...............................482
Trailer Towing Guide.......................477
Trailer Weight............................477
Transfer Case ............................557
Fluid .............................557, 587
Maintenance ...........................558
Transmission
Automatic ......................393, 395, 555
Fluid .............................555, 587
Maintenance ...........................555
Shifting ..............................393
T
ransmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .23
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .23
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .........20
626 INDEX
Transporting Pets ..........................93
Tread Wear Indicators ......................448
Trip Odometer ...........................255
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) .....................42, 43
Trunk Release, Emergency ....................43
Trunk Release Remote Control .................42
Turn Signals..........................152, 255
UCI Connector ...........................342
Uconnect®
Customer Programmable Features ........297, 319
Operation .............................342
Uconnect® Settings ................22, 297, 319
Uconnect® Settings....................21, 22, 31
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features ......33, 295, 316
Passive Entry Programming ..........33, 295, 316
Uconnect Settings ....................295, 316
Uconnect® Voice Command..................365
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................605
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .342
Unleaded Gasoline ........................459
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................52
Vanity Mirrors ...........................118
Vehicle Certification Label ...................470
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............6
Vehicle Loading ....................434, 470, 472
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............7
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) ..........18
Vehicle Storage........................362, 579
Viscosity, Engine Oil .......................535
Voice Recognition System (VR) ................365
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .255
Warnings and Cautions.......................6
Warranty Information ......................602
10
INDEX 627
Washer
Adding Fluid ..........................544
Washers, Windshield....................159, 544
Washing Vehicle ..........................559
Water
Driving Through ........................408
Wheel and Wheel Trim .....................561
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care .................561
Wind Buffeting ........................41, 236
Window Fogging .........................363
Windows ................................38
Power ................................38
Reset Auto-Up ..........................40
Wind Buffeting ..........................41
Windshield Defroster .......................97
Windshield Washers ....................157, 159
Fluid ................................544
Windshield Wiper Blades....................543
Windshield Wipers ........................157
Wiper Blade Replacement ...................543
Wipers, Intermittent .......................158
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ......................161
628 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Charger
OWNER’S MANUAL
2015
2015 Charger
15D481-126-AE Fifth Edition Printed in U.S.A.
FCA US LLC
